Pcs Cdma Minicell
Pcs Cdma Minicell
Pcs Cdma Minicell
CDMA Minicell
Description, Operation, and
Maintenance
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Technologies Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of
Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used
except in accordance with applicable agreements
Copyright 1999 Lucent Technologies
Unpublished and Not for Publication
All Rights Reserved
This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It
may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to
Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the
express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business
management owner of the material.
For permission to reproduce or distribute, please contact:
Product Development Manager1 888 LTINFO6 (domestic)
1 317 322 6848 (international)
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time
of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the
use of remote access features.
In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent
Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give credit for
charges that result from unauthorized access.
Trademarks
AUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies
Cadweld is registered trademark of ERICO Products, Inc.
Twist-Lock is a registered trademark of Hubbell Inc.
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Not
Applicable
Poor
Clarity
//////////////////
//////////////////
Completeness
//////////////////
Accuracy
//////////////////
Organization
//////////////////
Appearance
//////////////////
Ease of Use
Examples
Illustrations
//////////////////
Overall Satisfaction
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:
Telephone Number:
Date:
Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Not
Applicable
Poor
Clarity
//////////////////
//////////////////
Completeness
//////////////////
Accuracy
//////////////////
Organization
//////////////////
Appearance
//////////////////
Ease of Use
Examples
Illustrations
//////////////////
Overall Satisifaction
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:
Telephone Number:
Date:
Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029
Preface
0-1
1.
1-1
2.
2-1
3.
3-1
4.
4-1
5.
5-1
6.
Diagnostics
6-1
7.
Troubleshooting
7-1
8.
Repairs
8-1
9.
9-1
10.
Glossary
10-1
GL-1
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Contents - 3
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents - 4
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preface
Contents
Contents
Preface-1
Preface-2
Sources of Information
Preface-3
Electromagnetic Interference
Preface-4
Service Available
Preface-5
Introduction
Preface-6
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
-1
Preface
Manual
Coverage and Revisions
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this
manual reflects hardware configuration at the time of shipment. Lucent
Technologies continually strives to improve the quality and reliability
of all its products, and in some instances, product changes may occur
just prior to shipment. Therefore, because of printing and distribution
requirements, some information in this manual may not reflect
hardware configuration as delivered. However, in all cases, when
required, updated information will be issued to you as rapidly as
possible.
Whenever this manual is reissued, the reason for reissue will be given
in this paragraph.
Issue 8 corrects errors from Issue 7.
Manual Organization
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-2
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Sources of Information
Preface
Sources
of Information
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation
Sources
Document Comments
customer documents
(317) 322-6416
(317) 322-6411
(317) 322-6646
(317) 322-6699
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
-3
Sources of Information
Preface
Indianapolis, IN 46219
U.S.A.
To order documentation electronically, visit the Lucent Technologies
Customer Information Center web site at:
http://www.cic.lucent.com
Related Documentation
Document
Cell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide
Cell Site Diagnostic Description
Cell Site I/O Manual
PCS CDMA Minicell Installation
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment
Reference
401-200-300
401-660-101
401-610-107
401-703-300
401-610-120
401-610-006
401-610-175
Hardware/Software
Options Information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-4
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Electromagnetic Interference
Preface
Electromagnetic
Interference
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electromagnetic
Interference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
-5
Service Available
Preface
Service
Available
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Engineering Services
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-6
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Introduction
Preface
Introduction
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General
Product Warranty
Customer Options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
-7
Introduction
Preface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-8
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Contents
1-11
- 1-12
- 1-13
- 1-16
- 1-17
- 1-19
- 1-21
- 1-23
- 1-25
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 1
1-27
1-29
1-32
1-34
1-36
1-37
1-39
1-40
1-43
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definitions
30 kHz
30 kHz
TDMA
Three users (2 timeslots per user) per channel
12
41 1 42
29
27 2 39 21 28
6 23 10
40
61
25 51 34
16 55 24
0
48 13
4
15
20
3
17 7 59
58 53 46 37
35
14 43
45 31
44
30
22
49 50
5 56
18
9
33 11
54
8
19
32
60
47
36
57
62
52 63 38 26
1.2288 MHz CDMA Channel
As many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.2288 MHz channel
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Selected Features of
Lucent Technologies
CDMA Implementation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Frequency Assignments
Diagram
1850
D
B
1865
1870
E
1885
1890
1895
F
C
1910
1930
D
B
1945
1950
E
1965
1970
1975
F
C
1990
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Frequency up-conversion is the process by which channels in the 800MHz band are converted to the 1900-MHz band. Frequency downconversion is the process by which channels in the 1900-MHz PCS
band are converted to corresponding channels in the 800-MHz band.
The table shows the relationship between channel number and the
transmit and receive frequency ranges.
Allowed Channels
PCS Channel
Band
PCS CDMA
Channel
Numbers
Receive
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
000-299
1850-1865
1930-1945
300-399
1865-1870
1945-1950
400-699
1870-1885
1950-1965
700-799
1885-1890
1965-1970
800-899
1890-1895
1970-1975
900-1199
1895-1910
1975-1990
Note that channels 0-24 and channels 1176-1199 are not allowed, and
that there are upper and lower limits for each band.
Frequency
Band
Allowed
Channels
25-275
325-375
425-675
725-775
825-875
925-1175
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 7
The frequency band used for the Korean market consists of 600 pairs of
radio frequencies, divided into three bands. Each band is 10-MHz wide.
K-PCS
K-PCS CDMA
Tx Frequency
Channel Block Channel Numbers Range (MHz)
Rx Frequency
Range (MHz)
Ak
0-199
1840-1850
1750-1760
Bk
200-399
1850-1860
1760-1770
Ck
400-599
1860-1870
1770-1780
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For PCS channel number and PCS frequency assignments, refer to the
following table. The center frequency in megahertz corresponding to
any channel number (N) can be calculated as shown in the table.
Channel #
Center
Frequency
(N)
(MHz)
Minicell
Receive
1<N<1199
0.05N+1850
Minicell
Transmit
1<N<1199
0.05N+1930
Value
Example
First Channel
325
Times Constant
0.05 MHz
Equals
16.25 MHz
Plus
1850.000 MHz
Equals
1866.2250 MHz
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 9
Step
Value
Example
First Channel
325
Times Constant
0.05 MHz
Equals
16.25 MHz
Plus
1930.000 MHz
Equals
1946.2250 MHz
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operational Perspective of
the PCS CDMA System
Architecture
Operations
Network
2.
3.
4.
Mobile terminal
PCS Access
Manager
OMP
T1 or E1
SS7
Public Networks
X.25
Base
Station
5ESS Switch
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
T1/E1 Network
Under normal conditions, the two data links between the Switch and
the Minicell are assigned the following roles:
The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS CDMA system:
PCSC
OMP
Rake Receiver
PCS ACCESS
MANAGER
Interference
GPS
CSN
ECP
IMS
Rake Receiver
Soft
Hand-Off
CNI
5ESS-2000 DCS
5E10
AM
DL0
DL1
CM
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
NCT
SM
PSU2
P
H
A
P
H
V
T1/E1
Network
F
R
P
H
DLTU2 ECSU
RFTG
SCT
DFI
C
C
C
TSI
Pilot Channel
Sync Channel
Paging Channel
CE
CE
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
DLTU2
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 13
Acronyms
The following table lists some of the acronyms used in a PCS CDMA
environment.
ACU
AM
Administrative Module
GPS
BCR
IMS
CCC
NCT
CE
Channel Element
OMP
CM
Communication Module
CNI
PHA
CSC
PHV
CSN
PSU2
CTU
RCC
DFI
SCT
ECP
SM
Switch Module
ECSU
TSI
PCSC
Base Station
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Network Interfaces
Transmit/Receive Antenna
Mobile Terminals
Two categories of units are used by the cellular subscriber: vehiclemounted and transportable units (Class I) and hand-held units (Class
III). A variety of styles and options are available in each category;
however, the basic functional operations of the vehicle-mounted units
and the hand-held units are identical. The subscribers unit contains a
microprocessor and is continually performing operations and
communicating with the cell site, even when not being used by the
subscriber. The subscribers unit performs these functions so that it can
be ready to receive an incoming call or make a call.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCSC Components
PCSC Diagram
OMP
ECP
SS7 Links
IMS
CSN
CNI
5E10
AM
CM
5ESS-2000 DCS
NCT
SM
PSU2
Soft Handoff
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
P
H
A
P
H
V
F
R
P
H
TSI
DLTU2
ECSU
DLTU2
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS Access Manager:
PCSC
OMP
PCS ACCESS
MANAGER
ECP
CSN
IMS
SS7 Links
Access Manager
Key Features
Autonomous registrations
Subscriber management
Roaming support
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 17
Access Manager
Capabilities
The expected traffic loads (plus sparing) of the various call types
up to the engineered capacity of the platform. Depending on these
system traffic loads, some number of Wireless Call Processing
Servers will be equipped (where each Call Processing Server
handles a specific engineered capacity)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5ESS-2000 Switching
Platform Key Features
CNI
Soft
Hand-Off
5ESS-2000 DCS
5E10
AM
DL0
DL1
CM
NCT
SM
PSU2
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
P
H
A
F
R
P
H
TSI
DLTU2
Functions
P
H
V
ECSU
DLTU2
The PCS Switch is based on the 5ESS-2000 switch. The PCS switching
function manages the connectivity between the PCS Base Stations and
the various networks (Local Exchange Carrier (LEC), Inter-Exchange
Carrier (IEC), Private, Signaling, Intelligent Networks, etc.).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 19
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 21
The diagram below shows the data path in the Switch and Minicell.
Packet Pipes originate at the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH)
and terminate at a CDMA Cluster Controller.
Switch Module(s)
PSU2
DLTU2
DFI-2
ECSU
TSI
PHV
FRPH
CE
DLTU2
DFI
DFI
CCC
CE
PSTN
T1 Fac.
(PCM)
CE
The definition of the Packet Pipe is done through the PPTG (Packet
Pipe Trunk Group) form of the AUTOPLEX RC/V system.
A further discussion on Packet Pipes is provided in Unit 9.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Packet Pipes physical interface with the Minicell is through the
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) that provides serial-to-parallel and
parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the TDM
buses internal to the Minicell. The Packet Pipe terminates at the CDMA
Cluster Controller.
Cluster Controller
Channel Elements
Cluster
Subcell
The diagram below shows the Packet Pipe connection to the Minicell.
1
Nailed-up
Packet Pipe
DFI
CCC
CE
24
CE
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 23
The PCS CDMA Minicell can presently support two different CUs, the
Thirteen Kilobit Channel Unit (TCU) and the Enhanced Channel Unit
(ECU).
The Packet Pipe size (i.e., the number of 64-kB DSOs allocated to a
Packet Pipe) is, at most, four for CCCs equipped with TCU Channel
Elements; more than four DSOs will be unused, unless channel pooling
is enabled. CCCs equipped with ECUs may be configured for larger
size Packet Pipes, up to a maximum of 16 DSOs on the same T1 line.
RF Engineering considerations determine that maximum.
Line Support
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Minicell Diagram
The PCS CDMA Minicell Site contains a PCS CDMA Minicell that is
designed to optimize performance for voice and data services at the
1.8-GHz to 2.0-GHz range. The Minicell maintains maximum
commonality with 800-MHz standards for CDMA (that is, IS-95 and its
extensions for PCS).
The diagram below represents the key components in a Minicell
receive or transmit path.
RCC
RFTG
SCT
CSC
DFI
C
C
C
CE
CE
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Offers good voice quality (i.e., lower frame error rates with
reduced fading, multiple base station communication, soft
handoffs, and no recognizable noise or cross talk)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 25
About Vocoders
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Fractional T1 Example
Diagram
1-7
Full T1
CDMA
Radio
CSU
Cell Site 2
1-7
CSU
CDMA
Radio
Cell Site 3
1-8 9-16 17-24
1-7
CSU
CDMA
Radio
Detailed Operation
Description
A full T1 comes into the first CSU from the MSC. This CSU reads
the first eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-1 through 8)
and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base
Station 1. The 8th line is the POTS line.
The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the second
CSU. In this example they occupy the last 16 DS0s (i.e. DS1-9
through 24).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 27
2.
3.
POTS Line
The POTS sub-feature work as follows. When the customer would like
to use the POTS line, they will provision a particular DSO for that
purpose. This DS0 will be dedicated as a POTS line until it is
deprovisioned by an operator.
Administrative Port
Data Lines
Each cell site needs two DS0s allocated for DL1 and DL0. The CSU
will translate the packet to the expected position of DS0 13 and 24. For
simplicity the example shows each eight DSOs allocated to the next
cell site. Actual use of this feature will likely be different.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Implementation
CDMA Implementation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
T1/E1 Lines
Transmit
Receive
The Minicell site provides carrier demodulation, signal despreading, deencryption, Walsh function demodulation, deinterleaving, channel
decoding, and sends the resulting signal to the PCSC in a Packet Pipe
over a T1 line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The PCSC converts the received signal into a voice communication and
sends it over the PSTN.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 29
CDMA Implementation
The following diagram shows the signal encoding that occurs in the
Minicell.
10
10
99
88
77
66
55
44
33
22
CTU
minicell Site
Carrier Modulation
Carrier Demodulation
11
11
Signal Despreading
12
12
Signal Spreading,
Walsh function
Modulation
64 bit Orthogonal
Symbol Demodulation
13
13
CCU
Encryption: Long
Code Scrambling
Bit Interleaving
Channel Coding
T1/E1
T1/E1
Packet Pipe in
DS1
BBA
CRC
Frame Relay
Bit Deinterleaving
15
15
16
16
MSC
11
14
14
Channel Decoding
Packet Pipe
Encoding
Decoding
17
17
PSTN
18
CL3805 - L1V7.0
tT h l i
i t
Encryption, long code scrambling: apply the users long code to provide
secure transmission (see page 1-32)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Implementation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit to mobile terminal: the handset decodes the signal and encodes
the mobile users voice
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
Carrier demodulation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
14
15
Bit deinterleaving
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Channel decoding
...........................................................................................................................................................................
17
18
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The forward traffic is encoded with the Long Mask code, and provided
through multiplexing with a power control bit that will be used by the
mobile to maintain its receive/transmit level.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The encoded signal is then assigned codes that are used to identify the
base station and sector to the mobile.
9.6 kbps
or 14.4 kbps
19.2 kbps
Speech
Processor
Power Control
Bits (800 bps)
Block
Interleaver
Walsh Function
I
Baseband
Filter
MUX
s(t)
Q
Baseband
Filter
19.2 kbps
Long Code
Mask for
User m
Long Code
Generator
Decimator
1/64
1.2288 Mbps
sin
Q Channel Pilot PN
Sequence 1.2288 Mbps
Legend:
= summed
Power Control
The Power control bit is used during call processing to maintain the
relative power of each individual active traffic channel, and to power it
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 33
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Long Code
The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal,
and thus ensures privacy.
This code, transmitted from the base station to the mobile, informs the
mobile which antenna face and base station the mobile is
communicating with.
Walsh Function
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Code Name
Long code mask
Walsh function
Pilot channel PN
code (short code)
Function
Voice privacy
Channel Formation,
0 - 63
Time Offset
12
39
41 1 42
29 0
2
17 28
10
6 23
25 51 34
43
16 55 24
40
48
4
37
15
35 13
3 58 20 46
21 7 59
39
53
14 43
41
49
45
22
30
11
44 5
31
50
56
18
54
8
9 33 38
19
32
60
47
36
57
62
63 26
52
27
40
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 35
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
When the CDMA signal is monitored on a test set running in the code
domain mode, each channel is represented by a separate bar
corresponding to its assigned Walsh code.
On the display, the supervision channels will have a higher power level
than the voice channels. The Pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is always the
first on the left of the display.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The mobile unit also assists the Minicell site in the handoff
process by measuring and reporting the strengths of the received
pilot signals.
Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of
the mobiles transmitting origination, page response, or autonomous
registration messages, the mobile units relative power level is
adjustable. Its maximum value is 1.2W (or 108 Digital Gain Units
(DGUs) representing 15% of the 8W total power when using a normal
CTU.
The Sync Channel
The sync channel is used by mobile units operating within the coverage
area of the Minicell site to acquire initial time synchronization. The
sync channel is always spread with Walsh function 32, transmits at
1200 bps, and its function is assigned to the same CE as the pilot for the
Minicell site or face.
Its nominal strength is 0.12 W (34DGUs) or 1.5% of total power.
Paging Channels
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 37
Paging channels:
Traffic Channels
The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carry
voice traffic.
Pilot (W0)
Paging (W1-7)
Sync (W32)
Voice Traffic
Voice Traffic
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Noise Sources
Signal Processing:
Transmit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 39
1.23 MHz
1.23 MHz
10 KHz
TX
RX
Correlator
Digital
Filter
Encoding &
Inter-leaving
PN Source
10 KHz
Filter
1.2288 Mbps
Signal Processing
1.25 MHz
Baseband
Filter
1.25 MHz
Baseband
Filter
Data
De-interleave
& Decode
PN Source
Signal Processing
Carrier
Carrier
Background
Noise
External
Interference
Other minicell
Interference
Other User
Interference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diversity
Diversity Diagram
Time
Path
Frequency.
The diagram below shows the various sources of echoes and other
multipath signals that can be utilized to improve signal quality.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rake Receiver
Interference
Interference
Rake Receiver Interference
MSC
Lucent Technologies
Rake Receivers
Enable diversity
The base station rake receiver has four fingers that can access multiple
antennas, whereas the handset rake receiver has one antenna with three
elements.
Time Delay
With time delay, each digital bit of information in the data packet that
is received by the cell site over the Packet Pipe is duplicated (9.6 kbps
becomes 19.2 kbps). The position of each new bit in the data stream is
rearranged in relation to the original bit. Thus, a loss of consecutive bits
during transmission will have little or no effect on the entire data
message. This is because their near duplicates are stored elsewhere in
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 41
the data stream and can be used to recreate the data. This common time
delay method is used to improve digital transmission of data packets.
Path Delay
In multipath data streams, identical data is received from more than one
path. It is received several microseconds apart due to the varying
lengths of the paths. Because the CDMA mobile has a rake receiver
with three receiver elements, as many as three multipath data streams
may be received independently. The mobile selects the best (lowest
FER (frame error rate)) packet of voice data in 20-ms frames from the
available signal source.
Frequency Delay
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Signal Transmission
All data rates include a frame quality indicator as part of the 20ms packet, which is also called a frame.
Traffic channels are assigned to unique CEs in the Minicell site or face.
Number of Traffic Channels
per Minicell Site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
1 - 43
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Objectives
This unit provides the cell site technician with the ability to locate
Minicell components that will need to be worked on as part of the
maintenance process.
The objectives to be achieved are as follows:
1.
Locate Components
This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to locate the
physical components in a Minicell so that they can maintain and/
or perform maintenance actions on them.
2.
Identify Functions
Another objective is to enable cell technicians to identify the role
of the different components that they have located.
3.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 1
are part of the Minicell overall signal path that also includes signaling
and control paths.
Contents
2-22
- 2-23
- 2-25
- 2-27
- 2-28
- 2-30
- 2-32
- 2-34
- 2-35
- 2-37
- 2-39
- 2-40
- 2-42
- 2-43
- 2-45
- 2-47
- 2-49
- 2-50
- 2-51
- 2-53
- 2-55
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-20
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2-62
- 2-63
- 2-64
- 2-65
- 2-66
- 2-67
- 2-69
- 2-74
- 2-76
- 2-79
- 2-80
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The PCS CDMA Minicell is the physical interface between the T1 line
from the 5ESS-2000 system and the wireless system antenna.
Equipment designed for a base station includes radio and power
cabinets.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Overview
CDMA Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Features
Transmit Configurations
Environmentally-hardened cabinets
CDMA technology.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Acronyms
CDMA Minicell
Connections Diagram
Growth
Cabinets
(Optional)
Receive (RF)
Transmit (RF)
Timing Ref.
T-Smart-to-DFI
Alarms
TDM Bus
l
l
l
PCS
CDMA
Minicell
Power
Cabinet
.0
Battery
Backup
Power
Cabinet
(Optional)
Commercial
Power (220 VAC)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
A PCS CDMA Base Station contains the PCS CDMA Minicell and the
Receive/Transmit Antenna. The Minicell itself is composed, at a
minimum, of a Primary Radio Cabinet and a Primary Power Cabinet.
Optional cabinets include one or more Growth Cabinets and one or
more types of Backup Power Cabinets.
The graphic below shows one of the possible layouts of a base station.
Primary
Radio
Cabinet
Growth Cabinets
Location (Optional)
Power
Cabinet
Battery Backup
Cabinet (Optional)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 7
Growth II
The primary power cabinet provides the power (240 VAC and 24
VDC) necessary for the functioning of the various circuits in the
primary and growth cabinets.
Antenna
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is the front view of the PCS CDMA Minicell with the receive
units and filters on the left side.
CRTUm
RSP
CSU
RFTG-m
Rb
RFTG-m
CSC 0
CTUs
PCU
ACB
PCU
Filters
(RUs 1,3,5
behind TFUs)
SIDE 0
SIDE 1
C
T
U
C
T
U
C
T
U
A
C
B
Side
Interface
Panel
CSC 1
RCC
X0
CSC
Heat
Exchanger
CCC 2
CCC 4
CRC
CCC 6
Alarm
Panel
The front of a primary cabinet shows the radio components, from top to
bottom:
Component Description
CRTUm
RSP
Radio Switch Panel, for switching signals to and from the CRTU
CSU
RFTG
RCC
CSC
Cell Site Controller, Part of the RCC, for control of the cell operations
CRC
CTU
Filters
RU
PCU
ACB
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The back of the cabinet contains the antenna and power connections.
DANGER
Electrical Burns
Serious burns may occur.
Antennas may need to be disconnected to perform
measurements. Make sure that there is no RF Power applied to
the antenna leads before disconnecting.
Components
RCC
BACK PLANE
CCC2
BACK PLANE
Side Interface
Panel
CCC4
BACK PLANE
Power Distribution
Assembly
CCC6
BACK PLANE
TX TX TX TX
S3P S3G S2P
S2G
TX TX
S1P
RX RX RX RX RX
LIGHTNING
PLATE
Connections
SAGE
S1G
RX
GPS
AIP
The following connections are accessible from the back of the radio
cabinet:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the layout of the primary radio cabinet.
CRTU
DUPLEX
J8
SIU
CSU 1
J7
RFTG 0
CSU 2
CSU 3
RFTG 1
CSC0
C
T
U
0
J6 -50
J4 -50
J5 -40
J3 -40
J9
C
T
U
1
TX
S1P
C
T
U
2
TX
S2P
CSC1
P
AC
CU
B
P
C
U
C
C N M C C MN C R
P C E P P EC P T
I I M U U MI IU
0 1
i
4 A
1 F
5 I
A
C
RSP
4
1
5
A
C
* * * *
cCC CC CC CC CC BI CA CB
cC U1 U2 U3 U4 U U R
c
CCC2
CCC4
TX
S3P
RX 0 RX 0 RX 0
J10
INTERFACE
PANEL
CCC6
Air
Duct
J1
S
C
T
/
D
F
I
44
1
5
A
A
C
C
BBA Group
Circuit
Breakers
AIM0
SIDE
EXT ALM 6
CLOSE
ON
ALARM
AIM 1
A
F
I
AIM1
SIDE
OPEN
ON
ALARM
AIM 0
CSU Remote
Optioning Port
EXT ALM 0
Shelf Layout
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Version 4.0 Minicell functions like its predecessor, with some
rearrangement of components to ease access and manufacturing, and to
enhance reliability.
Air Ducts
CTU
RFTGm
Larger Heat
Exchanger
6 Filters
Combined
CRTUm and RSP
Physical Differences
between Version 2 and
Version 4
Front
Front
Back
Back
The RFTGms have been moved below the CTUs. In their place
are air ducts that enable vertical air flow for cooling the inside of
the Minicell. The RFTGms are now placed on top of each other,
rather than side-by-side.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 13
Location Changes
The CTU cooling fan is now in the back of the Primary Cabinet.
This leaves clear access to the CTUs for replacement or upgrade
to HPCTU. That configuration, coupled with the more powerful
Heat Exchanger and the improved cooling air flow eliminates the
need for a secondary Heat Exchanger for either HPCTU operation,
or high temperature environments.
Receive Filters that were in the Side Panel have been moved and
there are now six filters accessible from the front of the primary
cabinet.
The CRTUm has been combined with the RSP into one unit and
moved to the bottom right front corner. It is now called a CDMA
Test Module.
Air ducts and fans have been put where the RFTGm was formerly
located.
Enhanced Primary
Location V4
CTU Fan
NFI
back center
Filters
RFTGm
front, top
CRTUm/
RSP
front, top
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Height
Width
Depth
Approx. Weight
Primary
Growth
Power
60 in (152 cm)
31 in. (79 cm)
30 in. (76 cm)
500 lb. empty
(227 kg)
48/220 AC
Parameter
Outdoor
-Temperature Range
-Humidity Range
Indoor
-Temperature Range
Normal
Short-term (Not to exceed 3
days at a time and 15 days per
year.)
-Humidity Range
Normal
Short-term
Specification
20 percent to 55 percent
10 percent to 80 percent
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The signal flow through a PCS CDMA Minicell has three components:
Control (Date Link) data: carries signals that manage the cell
operation
The following diagram shows the three signal flows (i.e., traffic;
control; and test) through the Minicell.
T1
3
PSU
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
P
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
R
T
U
m
A
F
I
D Packet Pipe
Data Link
F
TDM BUS
I
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
C
P
U
BIU
C
C
C
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
Tx
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Rx
Depending on configuration,
can be ECUs or TCUs
CL3805 - L2V7.0
04/08/1999
10
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
FILTER
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
CSC1
Tx
Rx
A
I
P
RU
Analog
Signal
Lucent Technologies - Proprietary
Transmit path
Digitally encoded signals from the switch (voice and control data) go
through a Protector Block.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Signals go then to a DFI board that interfaces them to the TDM bus.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Voice Data
Control Data
Receive path
Test data
Acronyms
ACU
AIP
BCR
CCC
CSC
CPU
CRTUi
CSU
DFI
NCI
PSU
RSP
Rx
The signal is split with voice data directed by a CCC in the CRC and
the control data sent to the CSC.
The voice data is processed and transmitted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Control data is processed in the CPI and sent from the NCI to the
other CSC units on the TDM bus.
The Receive path is essentially the reverse of the Transmit path, except
that the signals go through the RU while bypassing the CTU.
Test data is supported by a CRTUm that feeds test signals emulating a
mobile. Test data will be covered in more detail in unit 3.
Acronyms in the Minicell have the following meanings:
AFI
ANT
BIU
CCU
CPI
CRTU
CRTUm
CTU
MEM
PCSC
RCC
RU
Tx
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 17
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The receive path for the Minicell follows 10 main steps. Note that the
antenna connections are at the back of the cell.
The following diagram shows the receive path for the PCS CDMA
Minicell. The antenna feed, item 1, enters the back of the Minicell.
7 65 4
10
Antenna
Antenna Interface Panel
Receive Filter and Receive Unit
Baseband Combiner/Radio
Analog Converter Unit
CDMA Channel Unit
CDMA Cluster Controller
Digital Facilities Interface
Channel Service Unit
Protector Block
CL3805 - L2V7.0
04/08/1999
11
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
Signals from a mobile source are received by the Antenna. Their path
through the cell is:
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 19
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The transmit path covers 10 main steps and is almost the reverse of the
receive path.
The follwoing diagram shows the transmit path of the PCS CDMA
Minicell. The antenna feed, Item 10, comes out the back of the cabinet.
4 5 6 7
8
3
9
1
10
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
Protector Block
Channel Service Unit
Digital Facilities Interface
CDMA Cluster Controller
CDMA Channel Unit
Analog Conversion Unit
Baseband Combiner/Radio
CTU and Transmit Filter
Antenna Interface Panel
Antenna
Signals from land-based sources are carried to the cell through a T1
line, connected at a protector block. Their path through the cell is:
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 21
Filter Assembly
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CRTU Diagram
The diagram below shows the location of the CRTU components in the
PCS CDMA Minicell.
FRONT
CRTUm
CSU
Rb RFTG-m
RFTG-m
CSC0
CRTUi
(Frame 1, Slot 15)
C
T
U
C
T
U
C
T
U
TFU
RFU
TFU
X0
RTU Switch
Panel (RSP)
CSC1
A
C
B
CCC2
CCC4
TFU
RFU
RFU
CCC6
P
D
A
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 23
CRTUi Functional
Description
CRTUi Faceplate
Description
The CRTUi contains the firmware needed to run the CDMA functional
tests. In response to functional test messages from the RCC, the CRTUi
carries out the specified actions and returns the test information to the
RCC. The message exchange is through TDM bus 0.
The CRTUi faceplate has three light-emitting diode(LED) indicators,
one red, one yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
CRTUm Functions
RU
Analog
Signal
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 25
The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including
forced handoff. (The term forced handoff means to change to another
Channel Element.)
In the Overhead Channel Functional Test, the signals are used to check
the Access Channel, the signal is recognized by the CCC, but does not
go back to the Switch.
In the Traffic Path Functional Test, the signal goes back to the ECP.
Version 4 Minicell
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The RSP connects the CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm) and
the PCS Receive and Transmit chains for functional and diagnostic
tests.
Physical Location
The diagram below shows the RSP position in the Minicell signal flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
TDM
BIU
BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
RU
Analog
Signal
Function
The CRTUm transmit output power is fed to the PCS receive chain
dual directional couplers. The coupled transmit output ports of the PCS
TX chain is fed to the CRTUm receive input port.
RSP Combiner
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rx
J17
J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28
J19 J21 J23 J25 J27
J1 to CRTUm Rx
J2 from CRTUm Tx
Power Switch
CL3805 - L2V7.0
4/08/1999
16
Operation
RSP Connections
J29 9-pin
(Unused)
J4 RX Test Monitor
The RSP is controlled by the CRTUi via an RS422 control bus. The
RSP contains a microcontroller board, and SP6T and SP12T RF
switches.
The table shows the RSP connections for 3-sector, 1-carrier
configuration.
RSP
Port
WH1
WH1 Cable # Filter Assy
Cable # Out of
Location
Into RSP Coupler
Coupler Port
Carrier
Tx Sector
Rx Sector /
Diversity
Forward -50 dB
Reflected -40 dB
J5
P1
P28
A1
J6
C1 Tx 1
Fwd -50
J6
P2
P48
A13
J6
C2 Tx 1
J7
P3
P27
A1
J5
C1 Tx 1
J8
P4
P47
A13
J5
C2 Tx 1
J9
P5
P30
A2
J6
C1 Tx 2
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Ref -40
Fwd -50
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Forward -50 dB
Reflected -40 dB
RSP
Port
WH1
WH1 Cable # Filter Assy
Cable # Out of
Location
Into RSP Coupler
Coupler Port
Carrier
Tx Sector
Rx Sector /
Diversity
J10
P6
P43
A15
J6
C2 Tx 2
J11
P7
P29
A2
J5
C1 Tx 2
J12
P8
P44
A15
J5
C2 Tx 2
J13
P9
P33
A3
J6
C1 Tx 3
J14
P10
P40
A17
J6
C2 Tx 3
J15
P11
P34
A3
J5
C1 Tx 3
J16
P12
P39
A17
J5
C2 Tx 3
J17
P13
P25
A1
J4
Rx 1 / D0
Fwd -50
J18
P14
P26
A1
J3
Rx 1 / D0
Ref -40
J19
P15
P46
A13
J4
Rx 1 / D1
Fwd -50
J20
P16
P45
A13
J3
Rx 1 / D1
Ref -40
J21
P17
P32
A2
J4
Rx 2 / D0
Fwd -50
J22
P18
P31
A2
J3
Rx 2 / D0
Ref -40
J23
P19
P41
A15
J4
Rx 2 / D1
Fwd -50
J24
P20
P42
A15
J3
Rx 2 / D1
Ref -40
J25
P21
P35
A3
J4
Rx 3 / D0
Fwd -50
J26
P22
P36
A3
J3
Rx 3 / D0
Ref -40
J27
P23
P37
A17
J4
Rx 3 / D1
Fwd -50
J28
P24
P38
A17
J3
Rx 3 / D1
Ref -40
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Fwd -40
Fwd -50
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Ref -40
OverviewOverview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 29
Growth I
Primary Cabinet
Growth II
CSC1
PCSC
8
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
SIU
The diagram below shows the position of the CSU in the Minicell and
the Minicell signal flow.
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
RU
Analog
Signal
CSU Function
CSU Features
The following describes the Kentrox CSU, one of the CSUs used with
the Lucent PCS CDMA Minicell.
The SIU provides the interface between the CSU and the
operators control terminal or the automated Network
Management System (NMS).
The CSU shelf terminal and network connections are via separate
15-pin female connectors on the back of the CSU shelf.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CSU Connections
CSU Option
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The diagram below shows the RFTG position in the Minicell cabinet.
Version 2
Description
Normal Operation
Version 4
Only one unit is active at a time and during normal operation the
rubidium unit:
Is active
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Backup Operation
RFTG-m Specifications
SDP
Other Information
About the need for GPS
The RFTG testing program can be ordered from the CIC. The order
includes the program, manual, and cables.
There is an icon on the Status Display Page 2138 to warn of a possible
synchronization problem. This icon is labeled Cell_Sync. A
combination of errors from the RFTG units, SCT board, and the CCC
are used to display MINOR, MAJOR, or CRITICAL Cell_Sync Status.
For more information on the GPS, see Lucent 401-660-128.
The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24-hour period. In the
absence of GPS signal, the Minicell goes into a flywheel mode,
where the Minicell continues to operate for up to 24 hours on the
rubidium oscillator, or up to 4 hours on the crystal unit. This is
explained in more detail in Lucent 401-660-128.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 33
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
RCC Diagram
The Radio Control Complex controls the minicell and contains two
CSCs for redundancy.
The diagram below shows the RCC position in the Minicell and signal
flows.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M
E
M
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
RCC Description
RCC Components
RU
Analog
Signal
The controller is equipped with two identical sides; one is active while
the other is on stand-by. The active side receives/sends control and data
information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components. The
stand-by side tracks what the online side is doing so that it may come
online as needed. Only one side is online at a time.
The radio control complex (RCC) shelf is fully redundant with
independent power circuits for each side of the controller for the
primary frame.
The RCC shelf is comprised of two Cell Site Controllers (CSC). Each
CSC consists of the following circuit packs:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
+5V
4
1
5
A
C
Shelf components are referenced by their slot number and the position
of their connection pins in the backplane.
The diagram below shows the board positions on the RCC shelf.
2 D 1D 0D
A
F
I
C
P
I
N M
C E
I M
4D 5D 6D
C
P
U
0
C
P
U
1
C
M N C R
E C P T
M I I U
i
CSC0
+5V
A
F
I
4
1
5
A
C
CSC1
Operation
The controller is equipped with two identical sides; one is active while
the other is on stand-by. The active side receives/sends control and data
information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components. The
stand-by side tracks what the on-line side is doing so that it may come
on-line as needed. Only one side is on-line at a time.
Acronyms
Acronyms in the table below are used for the boards of the RCC shelf.
CSC
CPI
CPU
NCI
AFI
MEM
Memory
The core processor controls the cell site controller which is made up of
the alarm/FITS board, NCI board, MEM board, and the CPI board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 35
Each side of the controller uses one core processor board. This
arrangement comprises a duplex controller that provides reliability
through redundancy. In this arrangement, the CPU in one side (active
side) is always in control of the call processing, while the CPU in the
other side (the mate) is kept in a stand-by state, and its memory is
continually being updated via the update bus. In the event of a failure in
the active side of the controller, this mode allows an immediate transfer
of control from the active CPU to the mate with a minimum loss of
control information. On each side of the controller, the CPU uses the
system bus to communicate with the other circuit boards on the same
side.
Alarm/FITS Interface
The Alarm and Factory Installation Test Set (FITS) Interface circuit
pack provide the interface required to store/process cell site alarms and
to send alarm status to the MSC via the Core Processor Unit (CPU). In
addition, the circuit pack contains the circuitry necessary to interface
the FITS to the cell site. The FITS provides a number of diagnostic
tests used to initially check out the Minicell after installation by Lucent
Technologies.
8-Megabyte Memory
One memory board is used with each side of the controller. The
memory circuit pack has a storage capacity of 8 Mb. It contains a
memory array which includes a 32-bit data array with one parity bit for
every eight bits of data. The memory and interrupt control
logic-write-protect and parity error latching functions are contained in
each circuit pack, which provides independent operation on a per-pack
level.
Communication Processor
Interface
The CPI board is part of the core processor complex. The CPI is a
multiprocessor circuit pack that provides the data connectivity between
the controller and any of the other terminating entities in the cellular
system. The CPI manages two point-to-point programmable, full
duplex, independent data links that implement the X.25 protocol.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the CTU position in the Minicell and signal
flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
Components
RU
Analog
Signal
The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) shelf contains the following circuit
packs:
Power Conversion Unit (2), used only in the primary frame (the
+24 V DC is input from the frame and +15 V DC is output to the
Receive Units via the ACB)
Alarm light on each CTU (these lights are difficult to see with the
fan in place)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 37
Swap-Out Rules
Cooling
On the Enhanced Minicell the cooling fan is in the back of the CTU
shelf.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CTU 0/1/2
Fan*
(Version 2 Only)
*In Version 4, CTU Fan is
in the back of the Cabinet
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM
RU
AMP
RST
The ACB also contains switches that determine the frequency Receive
and Transmit bands used by the Minicell. The settings of these switches
are used to set the CTU and RU filters.
The Alarm Control Board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicell frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the AFI
board located within the Radio Control Complex (RCC).
The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment
sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports both
amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to
the AFI. The LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit
(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf. The AFI can send out
up to 32 unique polling requests in approximately a two-second period
of time.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 39
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the position of the filters in the Minicell
cabinet and the signal flow. There is a view of the side panel filters on
page 2-57.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M
E
M
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
RU
Analog
Signal
The Primary Radio Cabinet can be fitted with either duplex or simplex
filters.
Up to three sets of filters (transmit and receive diversity 0 and diversity
1) are installed:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Filter Unit...
TFU
RFU Div0
DFU
(Combined
TFU and
RFU Div0)
Antenna
Receive signal
Antenna connection
Two test path signals
15-MHz Reference Signal
Transmit signal
Antenna interface
Receive signal
Four test path signals
The PCS CDMA Enhanced Primary Minicell has all 6 filters in the
front.
The REO means there are two filter types for replacement purposes.
The Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) portion of the REO
requires new filter types to account for the Masthead Amplifier Unit
(MAU).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 41
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Receive
Filter Unit
(RFU)
L3805 L2V7 0
Simplex Configuration
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
TDM
BIU
BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
Description
RU
Analog
Signal
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 43
15 MHz Reference
Frequency
Backplane Signal
Terminations
The CRC backplane also supports the terminations for the 19.6608MHz clocks, the GPS time-of-day clock, the Cluster bus clocks, the
TDM bus, and other control signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram shows the board for the three CRC shelves.
Slot #
Shelf 0
Slot #
Shelf 1
Slot #
Shelf 2
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
S
C
T
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
S
C
T
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
D
F
I
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 45
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BCR
ACU
BIU
CCU
DFI
SCT
415AC
The CCC provides a control and data interface between the TDM bus
and up to four 13-kbps CDMA channel units (CCUs). The CCC
manages the CCUs.
A CCC and its CCUs form a CDMA cluster; there is one cluster per
shelf.
Each CCC terminates the dedicated packet pipe associated with its
CDMA cluster. The CCC extracts the voice data from the incoming
packets and distributes the data to the appropriate CCUs for processing.
In the reverse direction, the CCC receives voice data from its CCUs,
assembles the data into packets, and then multiplexes the packets onto
the packet pipe.
Each TCU contains two CEs; thus, a fully loaded CDMA cluster
contains 8 CEs.
ECU Capacity
Each ECU contains 10 CEs; thus a fully loaded CDMA cluster contains
40 CEs. Each CE is configured to interface with a 13-kbps vocoder and
can support 8-kbps as well.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 47
Vocoder Rates
The BIU provides a control bus interface between the TDM bus and its
associated ACU and BCR. It also provides power conversion for its
associated ACU and BCR as explained below.
The BIU has an on-board converter circuit that converts +24 V DC to a
precise +5 V DC, -5.2 V DC, and +12 V DC. The ACU uses the +5 V
DC and -5.2 V DC, while the BCR uses all three voltages.
The ACU combines the digital transmit signals from the cluster and
then converts the signals to analog for input to the BCR.
In the reverse direction, the ACU converts the analog receive signals
from the BCR to digital and then distributes the digital signals to the
cluster.
CDMA Baseband
Combiner/Radio (BCR)
44WR1
CDMA Synchronized Clock
and Tone (SCT) Unit
TN1703
The BCR accepts analog signals from and sends analog signals to its
associated ACU. The BCR is responsible for RF transmission and
reception.
The SCT generates the CDMA clock signals for the Minicell. The SCT
performs the following TDM bus functions: bus clock generation and
monitoring for the TDM bus, maintenance tone generation, and
maintenance tone detection.
The DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data
conversion between the T1 or E1 lines and the TDM buses internal to
the Minicell. Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface
port.
This is the same unit used with each side of the RCC and has the
following features:
Each circuit board that is plugged into the power plane has a
programmable resistor that corresponds to the current drawn by the
board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the switches on the DFI board for a T1 line.
1
OFF
OFF
ON
SW 1
ON
ON
ON
SW 6
OFF
SW 4
OFF
ON
SW 2
ON
OFF
SW 3
Function
DFI Functionality
OFF
SW 5
ON
OFF
SW 7
The DFI provides the interface between the TDM bus and the CSU.
One DFI can be accommodated in the primary frame.
The Minicell platform uses TDM timeslots to nail up the logical
connection between a packet pipe on the T1 or E1 line and the
associated CDMA cluster. The TN3500B supports two T1/E1 lines
although the system supports only one. The newer DFI board,
TN1713B, supports only one T1/E1 line.
The DFI is located in shelf 2 (lowest shelf) of the CRC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 49
Frame Pedestal
Frame Pedestal
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This diagram below shows the positions of the components near the
bottom of the Minicell.
Composed of
Circuit Breaker Panel
Alarm Interface Panel
Side Interface Panel
Rear Interface Assembly
L2V7 0
Description
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Interruption
There is a chance of unnecessarily powering down
equipment causing service interruptions.
Some of the breakers are easy to trip. Be careful not to touch
them inadvertently when working around them.
Circuit Breaker Diagram
Function
CB19
2.
CB17
3.
CB15
4.
CB20
5.
CB18
6.
CB16
7.
the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14 (except CB6 &
7)
To power the radio cabinet back up, the prescribed sequence is CB1 to
CB20, and then the BCR faceplate switches.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 51
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The diagram below shows the position of the alarm panel in the
Minicell cabinet.
The User Alarm Cross Connect Board provides the customer with a
pre-wired (fixed) user alarm interface board. It is wired during
installation as per the customer requirement for external user alarms.
Two alarm interface modules connect to the primary frame. They are as
follows:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 53
User Alarms
There are eight alarms available to the user, and seven can be set to
open on alarm or close on alarm, but the 8th alarm is close on
alarm only.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
User alarm connection definitions are made using slide switches on the
circuit board and are located in the primary cabinet just above the T1
facilities and alarm interface board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 55
The side and rear panels contain fewer components than the front panel
but are still important to maintenance of the Minicell. This section
consists of information on the side and back of the Minicell:
Side Panel
Heat Exchangers
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 56
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the components on the left side of the
Minicell.
Receive Units
RX1
Receive Filter/RX1
Receive Unit Assemblies
(Simplex only)
FRONT
Side Interface
Panel for Growth
Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 57
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Rear Interface Panel (RIP) contains the Antenna Interface Panel
(AIP) and the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).
Electrical Burn Danger
Risk of serious burns.
To avoid injury be sure that the cell cannot transmit when
disconnecting the antennas.
S3G
S2P
S2G
S1P
RF
Test
S1G
RX/DX
S3D0/P S3D1/G S2D0/P S2D1/G S1D0/P S1D1/G
GPS
OMNI
TX
C3P
C6G
C5G
C4G
RF
Test
DX
D1(C2P)
Function
D0(C1P)
GPS
The rear interface panel provides the interface for the antenna cables,
power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.
The Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) provides access to antenna leads
and is used to input or measure test signals during performance testing.
Connections are clearly marked according to a simple code, that
identifies sector (S) and frame (P=Primary, G=Growth). For example,
S1D0/P is Sector 1 Transmit and Receive (Diversity) zero for a
Primary frame with duplex filter panels.
Three-Sector Configuration
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 58
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Connections, identified in the table below, are the same for each sector,
and depend on the type of equipped filter.
Primary Filters Primary Simplex Primary Simplex Primary Duplex
Growth Filters Growth Simplex Growth Duplex Growth Simplex
Primary Duplex
Growth Duplex
TX Primary
TX Growth
RX0 Primary /
RX0 Growth
RX1 Primary /
RX1 Growth
S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D0/P
(Bottom Row)
S1D1/G
(Bottom Row)
S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Omni Configuration
Power Distribution
Assembly
S1D0/P
(Bottom Row)
S1D1/G (Bottom S1/G (Top Row)
Row) (Splitter)
S1D0/P (Bottom S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Row) (Splitter)
2.
3.
C3P is the Transmit for Carrier 3 (Primary) and C4G - C6G are
Carrier 4 - 6 and may be equipped in a Growth Frame.
Has power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 59
Heat Exchanger
Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Before Working on a
Minicell Cabinet
When opening a door fitted with a heat exchanger, make sure that you
have secured it in the open position.
Structure of a Version 2
Primary Cabinet Heat
Exchanger
The heat exchanger does not have a redundant set of internal and
external blowers, mounts on the front door of the primary cabinet and is
designed for the outdoor application. Insect screens are mounted inside
the door in the lower area.
The heat exchanger supports cooling fans and heaters, and is alarmed.
The only other air movers within the Minicell primary cabinet are a
single CTU shelf fan for cooling the CTUs, and a frame fan (located
below the bottom CRC shelf).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 60
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Heat Exchanger
The conditions for, and the reporting of, fan alarms follows:
Five electrical wires (two for +24V and +24V return, and three for
alarms) are connected to each of these fans.
The three alarm output connections are isolated from the two
+24V input connections.
Fan alarm electronics are powered from the +15 V CTU shelf
power converter. The output is an open collector type, which
switches on low if fan speed drops below a predetermined level.
These fan alarms are run to the AFI circuit pack and have the same
ground reference.
Some heat exchangers have self-testing key pads. See page 8-63 for
more information.
The heat exchanger for the Enhanced Primary Minicell is able to cool
the cell and no back unit is needed for HPCTU equipped Minicells. The
associated heater can put out 1100 watts.
CAUTION
Handling the HPCTU Heat Exchanger Panel
The HPCTU exchanger is a heavy unit.
Seek assistance before removing the heat exchanger to prevent
injury.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 61
Heat Exchanger
The Minicell can contain other cabinets and are described in this
section. These cabinets are as follows:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 62
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Special Omni
Special Omni
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Special Omni
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 63
Growth Cabinets
Growth Cabinets
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Besides the Primary Radio Cabinet, a PCS CDMA Minicell can have
growth cabinets. The growth cabinets have basically the same
structure. Like a primary cabinet, the growth cabinets contain three
CRC shelves and one CTU Assembly (with fan in the back of the unit).
The diagram below shows the growth cabinets position in the minicell.
Primary
Growth I
Growth II
Growth I Cabinet
Growth II Cabinet
Combinations
Nine-Carrier Omni
Three-Sector Multiband
2 - 64
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Growth I Layout
CRC0
C C C C C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U UU U UU R T U
3
CRC1
C C C CC B A B D P
C C C CC I C C F C
C U U UU U U R I U
2
CRC2
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
A
C
B
P
C
U
1
P
C
U
2
CTU Blower
AC
DC
PDA
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
PDA
REAR VIEW
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 65
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T
F
U
T
F
U
T
F
U
C C C CC BA B S P
C C C CC I C C CC
C U U U U UU R T U
4
CRC0
C C CC C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U U U U UU R T U
5
CRC1
C C C CC B A BD P
C C C CC I C CF C
C U U UU U U R I U
3
CRC2
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
P
A C
C U
B 1
CTU Blower
P
C
U
2
AC
DC
PD A
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
PD A
AIP
REAR VIEW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 66
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to CRC and CTU shelves, Growth III contains filters and
CSU for additional carrier operation. It is to be available Autumn 1998.
The Growth III Simplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth
II, including simplex filter cage and simplex transmit filters, except for:
Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU
The Growth III Duplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth
II, except for:
Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 67
The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth III cabinet.
T
F
U
T
F
U
C C C CC BA B S P
C C C CC I C C CC
C U U UU UU R T U
4
CRC0
C C CC C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U U U U UU R T U
5
CRC1
T C C C CC B A BD P
F C C C CC I C CF C
U C U U UU U U R I U
3
CRC2
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
P
A C
C U
B 1
P
C
U
2
CTU Blower
AC
DC
PDA
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
AIP
PDA
REAR VIEW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 68
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
Rack-Mounted Growth
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Component Differences
Indoor cabinet
Smaller footprint
Cabinet
CTU
TDM Bus
CSU
Interface Panel The interface panel integrates the power, antenna, and T1/E1
interface. This interface is protected from lightning and
electronic surge.
Power
Carrier Locations
For CRC shelves, the first carrier number goes on the right. The
second carrier goes on the left CRC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 69
Rack-Mounted Growth
Antenna Reduction
Program
Carrier Assignments
The bottom CTU gets the first carrier and the upper CTU gets the
second carrier.
The circuit breakers at the top of the cabinet are the reverse of the
CRC shelves. The circuit breaker for the first carrier is on the left
and the second carrier is on the right.
This feature will ensure that the number of antennas required to support
a PCS CDMA Minicell with up to six CDMA carriers (up to five
growth cabinets) is within limits imposed on service providers by
zoning restrictions. The current limit is believed to be 12 antennas per
cell tower. The number of antennas will be minimized with the use of
duplexers, dual-carrier linear amplifiers, or high-power combiners.
According to the RF and antenna conditions, either a simplex or
diplexer filter supports the transmission. The receive filter in the
primary cabinet is shared by all CDMA carriers.
Each rack-mounted growth cabinet contains two carriers. The cabinet
services the next two carriers in the minicell configuration. For
example, a minicell site with a primary, growth 1 and rack-mounted
growth 2 would place carrier 2 in growth 1 and carriers 3 and 4 in RG2.
A similar minicell arrangement would contain the primary cabinet,
RG1, and growth III with carriers 2 and 3 in the RG1 cabinet and
carrier 4 in growth III.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 70
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
PDA
PDA
CRC0
CRC0
CRC0
CRC1
CRC1
CRC2
CRC2
CRC0
CRC1
CRC1
CRC2
CRC2
CRC FANS
CRC FAN
C3
C2
S
1
S
2
C
T
U
0
C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
CTU
FAN 2
C
T
U
0
C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
CTU
FAN 1
S
1
S
0
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
S
2
The table below shows the CTU logical number versus physical
number in Status Display Page 2136.
Sect
or
Circuit
ID
CTU
No.
Carriers
29
30
31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 71
Rack-Mounted Growth
Sect
or
Circuit
ID
CTU
No.
Carriers
10
11
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
16
15
17
The table below shows the CTU/RU hardware shelf equipment name
(physical ID and the logical ID) for various cell configurations.
S/
U
elf
uip.
me
RU/
CTU
Name
SDP/TI
3 sector/3 carrier
6 sector/1 carrier
9 carrier OMNI
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
Sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sector
carrier
U1
CTU29
LAC29
Sl-C1
LAC29
Sl-Cl
LAC29
Cl
LAC29
Sl-Cl-BA
RU29-0
LAC29
S1-D0
LAC29
Sl-D0
LAC29
D0
LAC29
S1-D0-BA
RU29-1
LAC29
Sl-D1
LAC29
Sl-Dl
LAC29
D1
LAC29
Sl-Dl-BA
U2
CTU30
LAC30
S2-C1
LAC30
S2-Cl
LAC30
C2
LAC30
S2-Cl-BA
RU30-0
LAC30
S2-D0
LAC30
S2-D0
na
na
LAC30
S2-D0-BA
RU30-l
LAC30
S2-D1
LAC30
S2-D1
na
na
LAC30
S2-D1-BA
U3
CTU31
LAC31
S3-C1
LAC31
S3-Cl
LAC31
C3
LAC31
S3-C1-BA
RU31-0
LAC31
S3-D0
LAC31
S3-D0
na
na
LAC31
S3-D0-BA
RU31-1
LAC31
S3-D1
LAC31
S3-D1
na
na
LAC31
S3-D1-BA
U4
CTU4
LAC4
S1-C2
LAC4
S4-C1
LAC4
C4
LAC4
Sl-Cl-BE
RU4-0
na
na
LAC4
S4-D0
na
na
LAC4
S1-D0-BE
RU4-1
na
na
LAC4
S4-D1
na
na
LAC4
Sl-Dl-BE
3 sector sharedcarrier
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 72
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
3 sector/3 carrier
6 sector/1 carrier
9 carrier OMNI
3 sector sharedcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
Sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sector
carrier
CTU5
LAC5
S2-C2
LAC5
S5-C1
LAC5
C5
LAC5
S2-C1-BE
RU9
RU5-0
na
na
LAC5
S5-D0
na
na
LAC5
S2-D0-BE
RU10
RU5-1
na
na
LAC5
S5-D1
na
na
LAC5
S2-D1-BE
CTU6
CTU6
LAC6
S3-C2
LAC6
S6-C1
LAC6
C6
LAC6
S3-C1-BE
RU11
RU6-0
na
na
LAC6
S6-D0
na
na
LAC6
S3-D0-BE
RU12
RU6-1
na
na
LAC6
S6-D1
na
na
LAC6
S3-D1-BE
CTU7
CTU1
LAC1
S1-C3
na
na
LAC1
C7
LAC1
S1-C2-BA/
E
CTU8
CTU2
LAC2
S2-C3
na
na
LAC2
C8
LAC2
S2-C2-BA/
E
CTU9
CTU3
LAC3
S3-C3
na
na
LAC3
C9
LAC3
S3-C2-BA/
E
PCS/
CTU
Shelf
Equip.
Name
RU/
CTU
Name
SDP/TI
CTU5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 73
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
TTLNA Diagram
The Range Extension Option (REO) requires a Tower Top Low Noise
Amplifier (TTLNA) and a cell equipped with HPCTUs. Its purpose is
to extend the range of the Minicell.
Increasing the Minicell range requires a balanced link budget. Gain
must be increased in the transmit path and the noise figure must be
reduced in the receive path.
Masthead
Amplifier Unit
(six used)
TX
TX
TX
PCS CDMA
Minicell
RX
RX
RX
DC BIAS/
ALARM
DC BIAS/
ALARM
DC BIAS/
ALARM
Alpha
Sector
Diversity 0
Gamma
Sector
Diversity 1
Alpha
Sector
Diversity 1
Power
Distribution
Unit
+24 V From
Power Cabinet
Two
Alarm Outputs
H
P
C
T
U
H
P
C
T
U
H
P
C
T
U
High Power
Amplifiers
MAS
RU
DC Bias Tees
(six used)
TX/RX Duplex Coaxial Cables
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 74
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 75
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The primary power cabinet provides the rectifiers for converting 220 V
AC to +24 V DC as needed by the Minicell. The power cabinet shown
is the 60C.
Fan Unit
Secondary Shelf
Rectifier
Assemblies
Primary Shelf
DC Distribution
Alarm Panel
AC Input Panel
Backup
Batteries
Battery String 1
Battery String 2
3805 L2V7 0
Key Components
750 W each
N + 1 redundancy
30 minutes @ 3 kW each
Maximum holdover
60 minutes @ 3 kW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 76
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Backup Batteries
AC Service Entrance
Maximum
DC Load
10
12
14
16
1600 W
3100 W
7.2
9.5
4600 W
4.4
5.8
7.3
2100 W
4050 W
5.1
6.8
8.5
10.3 12.2
6000 W
3.1
4.1
5.2
6.3
8.8
10.4
7.5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 77
Indoor Version
There is a version of the power cabinet made for indoor Minicells. The
indoor primary doesnt need heat exchangers. Their physical
appearance may change from installation to installation, with power
bays usually built without the protective enclosure required for outdoor
operation.
Optioned Items
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 78
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the layout of the Minicell power cabinet.
31 in./79 cm
FAN UNIT
CPS(2)
(SECONDARY SHELF)
CPS (1)
(PRIMARY SHELF)
DC DISTRIBUTION
AC INPUT
POWER
PANEL
ALARM
PANEL
BATTERIES
STRING 1
STRING 2
.ppt
Components of a Power
Cabinet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
2 - 79
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewDescription
S t r in g 9
S t r in g 7
2
S t r in g 6
2
S t r in g 4
S t r in g 1
S t r in g 3
Output Bus
and Protection
S t r in g 8
S t r in g 5
2
S t r in g 1 0
2
S t r in g 2
Maximum holdover
Eight hours @ 3 kW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 80
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
Purpose
Connections and
Schematic Drawings (SDs)
Contents
3-3
- 3-5
- 3-6
- 3-7
- 3-8
- 3-9
- 3-10
- 3-11
- 3-12
- 3-14
- 3-18
- 3-19
- 3-20
- 3-21
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 1
Test Paths
3-22
Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-23
Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-24
Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration 3-25
Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging - 3-27
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access Channel - - 3-29
Functional Tests -- Traffic Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
Functional Tests -- Pilot Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33
Functional Tests -- Antenna - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
Functional Tests -- Single Channel Selective - - - - - - - - 3-37
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell Connections
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Cable View
Voice (traffic)
Power.
The picture below shows the cabling connections at the back of the
primary cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 3
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplex:
Antenna Connections
Diagram
Rx1
The diagram below shows the simplex and duplex antenna connections
for the Minicell.
Version 4.0
Version 2.0
Rx1
Tx
Simplex Filters
Rx1
Rx0 and Tx
Rx0 and Tx
Rx0
Duplex Filters
Minicell Version 4
Configuration
All Receive and Transmit filters are placed side-by-side and are
accessible from the front of the Version 4 Primary Cabinet.
Growth Cabinet II
Filters are placed side-by-side and are accessible from the front of the
Growth II Cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 5
Signal Buses
Signal Buses
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Update Bus
This bus carries signals that enable the stand-by CPU to shadow the
primary CPU, so that it can take over cell operation whenever the
primary CPU experiences a failure.
System Bus
TDM Bus
Cluster Bus
This bus connects a CCC to all the CEs it controls. There is one Cluster
bus for each Cluster Controller.
CPU 0
CPU 1
SYSTEM BUSES
A
F
I
N
C
I
C
C
C
C
P
I
B
I
U
M
E
M
S
C
T
A
F
I
TDM BUS
C
C
C
B
I
U
S
C
T
CE
ACU
ACU
BCR
BCR
N
C
I
C
C
C
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
B
I
U
M
E
M
D
F
I
RX 0
TX TO CTU
RX 1
Cluster Bus
BBA TRIO
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C
P
U
U p d a te B u s
S y stem B u s 0
C
P
I
N
C
I
S y stem B u s 1
M
E
M
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
P
I
TD M B us A
TD M B us B
C
C
C
B
I
U
S
C
T
C
C
C
CRC0
B
I
U
S
C
T
C
C
C
CRC1
B
I
U
D
F
I
CRC2
C P U - C o re P ro c e s s U n it
C P I - C o m m u n ic a tio n s P ro c e s s o r In te rfa c e
N C I - N e tw o rk C o n tro l In te rfa c e
M E M - M em o ry
B IU - B u s In te rfa c e U n it
C C C - C D M A C lu s te r C o n tro lle r
D F I - D ig ita l F a c ilitie s In te rfa c e
T D M - T im e D iv is io n M u ltip le x
.p p t
Legend
Description
The following are devices connected to the TDM and System buses:
Acronym
Text
BIU
CCC
CPI
CPU
DFI
MEM
Memory
NCI
TDM
The TDM bus permits voice, data, or control connectivity to any circuit
pack connected to the TDM bus. The bus is separated into two
physically separate buses to improve system reliability.
Synchronization of TDM bus control channel messages between the
CPU and a circuit pack connected to the TDM bus is performed by the
NCI.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The optional CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 4-slot shelf housing one to
three T-SMART CSUs and one Shelf Interface Unit (SIU). The SIU
provides a common interface for all CSUs within a shelf for a single
Video Display Terminal (VDT) or a Network Management System
(NMS). The VDT is required to option the T-SMART CSU. VDT
interface options are switch selectable. Default options are 9600 bps,
one stop bit, 8 bits per word/character, and no parity. Refer to
Kentrox Operators Manual 77000-GD for detailed information on
the T-SMART CSU.
The CSUs connect to the DFI(s) in CRC shelf 2 (lowest shelf) on the
Minicell (terminal) side of the interface. The T1 (network) side of the
interface is connected to a T1 terminal lightning protection block,
which is also used to protect external user alarms. The DFI circuit pack
can be optioned for either a T1 or E1/CEPT interface, and each DFI
provides two DS1 lines. Each CSU handles only one DS1 line, so each
fully loaded DFI requires two CSUs. Each DS1 line is a 4-wire
connection.
T-SMART
MSC Interface
The primary cabinet is connected to the MSC via T1/E1 facilities. The
number of facility interfaces is determined by the number of voice
circuits and data links that the cell supports. Voice traffic is transmitted
between the cell and the MSC over packet pipes. Control and status
information is transmitted via one or two data links.
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Omni Configuration
Omni Diagram
Shelf
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Three-Sector Configuration
3-Sector Diagram
The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMA
clusters to the antenna for the 3-sector configuration.
Shelf 0
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
Shelf 1
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
Shelf 2
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CE Pooling
Every CCC that has Traffic CEs is assigned a Packet Pipe to carry
traffic to/from the MSC.
CE pooling enables cross-connection between Clusters. Consequently,
there is no relationship between the packet pipe and the RF sector that
is being broadcast by the BCR equipped on the corresponding shelf. As
a result, to reach a given level of service, a cluster may need to be
equipped with more CEs than required from RF engineering
computations.
The diagram below shows the signal path cross connections between
the ACUs and the BCRs.
TDM Bus
CSC
BIU
CCU
ACU
BIU
CCU
B
C
R
ACU
BIU
CCU
B
C
R
B
C
R
ACU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reference Frequency
Distribution Diagram
The diagram below shows the distribution of the reference signal to the
Minicell.
J7
J7
RFTG
Rubidium
Crystal
P25
1
:
6
3
4
5
6
GPS
J4
P47
2:4
P44
1
:
3
P36
RU2 (S1D1)
P28
P15
RU5 (S3D0)
P27
P13
P26
P11
P48
P52
RU4 (S2D1)
RU3 (S2D0)
RU1 (S1D0)
P49
P54
P50
P56
P46
1
:
6
CTU 1 (S2P)
CTU 0 (S1P)
P61
P75
P60
P59
P73
SCT 0
P70
3
4
BCR 1
P58
P68
SCT 1
P57
P64
BCR 2 CRC2
5
6
2-to-4 Splitter
P38
SIP
Timing Signals
P29
RU6 (S3D1)
CTU 2 (S3P)
J7
Signal Divider
P39
P34
P45
P40
P30
J4
P35
P37
P31
BCR 0
CRC0
CRC1
50 ohm
terminator
Receiver Units
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
becomes the primary.). The function of the 2-to-4 splitter is to split the
incoming 15 MHz reference signal into four separate output signals for
the RU, CTU, CRC complexes, and growth frame.
1-to-3 Splitter
The primary cabinet is equipped with one 1-to-3 splitter. The 1-to-3
splitter splits the 15 MHz reference signals from the 2-to-4 splitter into
three separate signals for CTUs in the primary cabinet.
1-to-6 Splitter
The primary cabinet is equipped with two 1-to-6 splitters. Each splits
the 15-MHz reference signal from the 2-to-4 splitters into six separate
signals for the RU and the CRC complexes.
1-to-2 Splitter
There are six 1-to-2 splitters, not part of the reference signal, which
split the receive signals from the RU to three separate signals for the
CRC complex in the primary cabinet and growth cabinet. Three are
assembled together so there are 2 assemblies each containing three
1-to-2 splitters.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 13
Power Distribution
Power Distribution
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
24 Volt Power Source
Power cables are first connected to the terminal block on the PDA
and then to the DC power conditioners.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Power Distribution
Power Distribution
Diagram
DC Power Conditioner
Terminal Lugs
35 A
35 A
35 A
35 A
Transient Capacitors
2
2
2
Circuit
Breakers
220AC
CRC 0
CB20 (25A)
CB19 (10A)
CB18 (25A)
CB17 (10A)
CB16 (25A)
CB15 (25A)
CB14 (5A)
CB13 (15A)
CB12 (2.5A)
CB1 (7.5A)
CB2 (5A)
CB3 (5A)
CB4 (5A)
CB5 (15A)
CB8 (2.5A)
CB9 (7.5A)
CB10 (10A)
CTU 0
CRC 1
CTU 1
CRC 2
CTU 2
RFTG Side 0
CB6 (5A)
RCC Side 0
CRTU
Fan 1
RFTG Side 1
CB7 (5A)
RCC Side 1
CSU Shelf
1
G
2
Heat Exchanger
Lightning Protector
Power Distribution
Assembly Diagram
35 A
Antenna Interface
DC Feeder
Tx
S3p S3g S2p S2g S 1p S1g RF Tes t
Rx/dx
6
Gnd L1
Gps
L2
240 Ac
3
2
Dc Feed
1
Pw r
Cab
Alar ms
T 1/e1
Ex t
U ser
Al arm s
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 15
Power Distribution
Note
The diagram depicts the 3-sector Minicell. The omni Minicell is quite
different.
Panel Description
Component Name
Qty
Circuit breaker values in this table depend on the version of PDA the
customer might have.
Powering Sequence
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Power Distribution
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 17
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T1 Facilities Interface
Diagram
OSP
(Network
Side)
T
GND
R
Front of
Cabinet
01
06
CPE
(Terminal
Side)
05
. 10
11
15
16
20
21
. 25
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
XMT to TELCO
RCV From Telco
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
From CSU
To CSU
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 21 22 23 24 25
Description
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
User Alarms
User Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXT ALM 6
AIM0
SIDE
AIM1
SIDE
CLOSE
ON
ALARM
O PE N
ON
A LARM
USER ALARM
STANDARD CROSS CONN EC T
ASSY 847576303
Wiring Options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 19
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections
Signal cables running through the Side Interface Panel connect the
Primary and Growth I cabinets. These cables carry the Receive and
Transmit RF signals, the 15MHz reference, and the Alarm signals. In
addition, there are connections from the CSU in the Primary to the
Growth I DFI, and from the primary RFTG to the Growth I CRC0,
terminating at the SCT board.
24V DC and 240 V AC power is directly provided to the Growth I from
the Power cabinet.
Growth I Cabinet
Connections Diagram
SIP
Receive (RF)
Transmit (RF)
15 MHz Ref
Growth
Cabinet 1
240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Primary
Cabinet
RS-485 Bus
(RFTG to SCT)
CSU to DFI
Alarms
Power
Cabinet
TDM Bus
Alarms
+24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Growth II Cabinet
Connections Diagram
Receive RF
Signals
Growth
Cabinet 2
Growth
Cabinet 1
240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Primary
Cabinet
RS-485 Bus
(RFTG to SCT)
CSU to DFI
Alarms
Power
Cabinet
TDM Bus
Digital &
Control
Signals
Alarms
+24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
Connections
The Growth II cabinet sends digital and control signals to the Primary
through the Growth I cabinet. The Primary cabinet sends RF receive,
digital and control signals to the Growth II cabinet through the Growth
I cabinet.
The 24 V DC and 240 V AC power is directly fed by the power cabinet
to the Growth II cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 21
Test Paths
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Test paths are used to verify that the cell Receive and Transmit control
paths are operating properly. These paths make use of the CRTU unit.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The diagram below shows the test path for a transmission in a simplex
configuration.
CTU
BCR
TX
Upconverter
Power
Amp
TX
Filter
-50 dB
(Frwd)
Coupler
-40 dB
(Refl)
CRTU
}
}
other sectors/
antennas
other sectors/
antennas
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The diagram below shows the test path for reception in a simplex
configuration.
BCR
RX
RX Coupler
Filter
LNA / Downconverter
(RX MODULE)
+ -50 dB
(Frwd)
-40 dB
(Refl)
other
...
/
} sectors
diversity
}other
sectors / diversity
...
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The CRTU can also be used to measure incident and reflected signals
in case the Minicell is equipped with duplex filters. The complexity of
the diagram reflects the increased number of components affected by
the test beyond those of the test paths for the simplex receive and
simplex transmit. The test path shows:
Transmit filters
Receive filters
Antenna 1
Antenna 2
Diversity 0
Diversity 1
The diagram below shows the test path for transmission and reception
in a duplex configuration.
Ant1
RX 1
RX 0
Upconverter
TX
Incident Ant1 TX
Reflected Ant1 TX
Reflected Ant2 TX
Incident Ant2 TX
Reflected Div 0 RX
Incident Div 0 RX
Incident Div 1 RX
Reflected Div 1 RX
Power
Ampl.
Duplexer
-50
Rx
-40
TX Module
BCR
C
R
T
U
-50
Ant2
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
} other sectors
} other sectors
} other sectors
} other sectors
other sectors}
other sectors}
other sectors }
Coupler
Tx
-40
Duplexer
-50
Coupler
Rx
-40
other sectors}
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 25
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Test Types
The CDMA Radio Test unit (CRTU) can perform functional tests on
the minicell.
There are several aspects of the minicell which are tested with
functional tests. These are as follows:
Traffic Path
Pilot Level
Antenna
If any of the overhead channels fail, then the Functional Test (FT) will
inform the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) of the failure. HEH will
then instruct the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) to
migrate the overhead channel assignment to a different CE. If HEH
determines that the overhead channel FT has detected three failures on
a minicell within a 15-minute period then HEH will request MRA to
remove the CRTUm from service. The reason for this is that it is
suspected that the CRTUm is faulty and not the CEs. If a faulty
CRTUm is left in-service it could cause overhead channel migration to
migrate through all available traffic CEs and eventually none would be
left to handle calls.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test verifies that the cell can transmit overhead channels and that
the mobile can access the overhead channel. The test uses the CRTU.
The overhead channel functional test is used to verify that the pilot,
sync, page, and access special purpose channels are working properly
by establishing a CDMA MOST call. This functional test first checks
the status of the mobile, then instructs the CRTUm to originate a call.
When the call is established, FT requests the status of CDMA overhead
channels from the CRTUm. When the call completes, it demonstrates
the proper operation of the carrier on which the call was made.
Test Overview
Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.
The test proceeds automatically, as follows:
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile in the CRTUm acquires the pilot, sync, and paging
channels for that face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the response indicates that the system is idle, the test has passed.
If the response indicates otherwise, the test has failed.
Pilot/Sync/Paging
Functional Test Diagram
The diagram below shows the overhead channel functional test signal
flows for the pilot/sync/paging channels. The line between the CRTUi
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 27
and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are
control lines. All other lines are voice.
RCC
PILOT/SYNC
PAGE CEs
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
C
C
C
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX
ANT
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test verifies that the cell can receive Overhead Channels. The test
uses the CRTU.
The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional test of the
overhead channel access channel. The line between the CRTUi and the
RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control
lines. All other lines are voice.
RCC
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
CTU
C
C
C
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
RU
Test Overview
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX
ANT
RX
ANT
Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.
The test proceeds as follows:
.......................................................................................................................................
If this test has passed, the CRTUi instructs the CRTUm to dial the
(MOST) directory number.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 29
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CCC informs the RCC (CRTUi) that the mobile has originated a
call.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the mobile to release the MOST number, and the
CRTUm releases the call and control of the RSP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test checks the entire traffic path in active and idle states, using the
CRTU. The objective of the traffic path functional test is to ensure that
a CDMA traffic path can be established through every traffic CE in the
Minicell and the established path is operational when used in a call.
Resource Usage
In order to perform the traffic path functional test, the CRTUm will
originate a call to a speech handler on the DCS and then the call is
handed-off to the next active non-busy CE in the Minicell. This handoff continues until all active, non-busy traffic CEs are tested. A CDMA
MOST call will be established to the DCS and forced handoff will be
performed to verify the traffic channel functionality. This test is very
resource intensive at the cell as the call is cycled through all CEs. The
design goal is to make this test less resource intensive at the ECP and
DCS and at the same time automate the process of CE selection for
handoff.
Error Handling
Test Overview
Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.
The test proceeds as follows:
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 31
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The ECP:
1.
2.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Channels
Functional Test Diagram
The RCC queries the status of the CRTUm. The CRTUm returns the
traffic channel state, indicating that the CRTUm is in a talk state.
Handoff procedures follow.
The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional tests on
the traffic channels. The line between the CRTUi and the RSP and the
line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines. All other
lines are voice.
RCC
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
ACCESS MGR/
SWITCH
M
O
S
T
E
C
P
D
F
I
D
F
I
CTU
C
C
C
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
RU
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX ANT
RX ANT
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This functional test provides the technician with the power level (in
dBm) of the CDMA pilot channel. This is an important factor in
determining the physical size of the Minicell coverage area.
Through the automatic initiated request, this test provides continuous
monitoring of the pilot signal strength and will report when the value
becomes out-of -tolerance. This test provides the technician with more
information to help detect and isolate hardware faults within the
Minicell.
Calibration Settings
Test Overview
Result: If any failures are detected during the execution of the Overhead
Channel portion of the Pilot Level test, then FT will notify HEH of the
failure. HEH will apply the same recovery and migration strategy as
described on page 3-26.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes then the pilot signal
strength measurement is taken.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 33
The test is a modified version of the Overhead Channel FT. Like other
FTs, PL can be executed manually or automatically. Frequency of
automatic (scheduled) PLFT is set in translations.
PLFT generates ROP output and alarms on the Status Display Pages
(Cartoon Pages) for out-of-tolerance Pilot Levels. The ROP indicates
the actual measured pilot level value and the expected pilot level value
(calculated by the software, based on amplifier type, pilot dgu, and
BCR attenuation values in translations).
The Pilot Levels need to be calibrated when any of these procedures are
performed on the Minicell:
PLFT Diagnostics
A failed PLFT will cause the cell status to show a major alarm (red) on
the 2121 page. The 2131 page will show CDMA equipment in trouble
(red). The 2138 page will show the affected CCC and PAF as degraded
(yellow). The PLFT must be executed with ATP results, or the cell
must be stable cleared to clear the alarm.
As with OCFT and TPFT, a manually initiated PL test will generate
ROP output. Scheduled PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not
operating correctly.
A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. The
most common is damage to the antenna from adverse weather. Without
this test the operator might be unaware that there is no transmission
from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating correctly.
CRTU fault Isolation - Antenna Test, commonly referred to as the
Antenna Functional Test (ANT FT) provides a means for maintenance
technicians to verify the proper operation of the CDMA cell sites. ANT
FT provides an alarmed output report on the ROP and an alarm
indication on the status and display page (SDP) when the tests indicate
that the antenna is not operating properly. This feature can be executed
in the manual mode or automatic mode.
Description
The CRTU measures the strength of the incident and reflected pilot
signal.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 35
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the energy reflected from the antenna is excessive, the test indicates
that insufficient RF energy may be being transmitted from the antenna
under test and therefore there may be an antenna fault.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit Antenna Tests on that sector are inhibited and the operator is
notified, who then decides on further maintenance action.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Description
More Information
If the CE is idle, the cell will instruct the CRTU to originate a call to a
pre-defined DN. When the cell sees the call origination from the CRTU
mobile, normal traffic channel allocation will be bypassed and the preselected CE is assigned to this call. If the call reaches the talk state, the
test will have passed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CE is busy with a call the cell, will attempt to execute the test with
a camp-on or other mechanism. If the attempt is successful, the test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
3 - 37
2.
The test was performed but the test identified deficiencies that are
given in the results.
3.
It was not possible to perform the test (together with the reason
why it was not possible to perform the test).
The results of the test will identify the speech handler (SH) in the test
path, the cell, the CE, the CCC, the BBA, the sector, and the carrier.
The CE implies a specific carrier and it is included as a convenience to
the operator. No recovery or fault isolation will be attempted if the test
fails.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Contents
4-5
- 4-6
- 4-8
- 4-9
- 4-10
4-12
- 4-13
- 4-14
- 4-15
- 4-16
- 4-17
4-18
- 4-19
- 4-20
- 4-21
- 4-23
- 4-25
- 4-27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 1
APX Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2121 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2131 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page
Sample Status Display Page - 2139 - - - -
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-42
4-44
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-50
Getting Information
4-51
Schematic Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-52
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
SDP/ROP Screens
SDP Reference
The screen images in the graphic below show the 2121 SDP and a
sample of the ROP output.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 3
Objectives
Objectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Objectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electronic access to the ECP at the PCSC can be done through a user
interface, using a laptop computer, provided that the Minicell site is
equipped with a regular telephone line. Depending on configuration
and login authorization, access to the ECP may be provided directly or
through the OMP.
The PCS CDMA Minicell user interfaces are supported by the
AUTOPLEX 1000 system.
Craftshell
The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways of
obtaining information pertinent to PCS CDMA Minicell performance,
and responding to that information. Although the ways are not the
same, the information that is returned is identical in scope.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
OMP Access
Reference
More information on the OMP and ECP can be found in the 401-610160 manual.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Using the OMP
Reference
Adjunct Processor
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The graphic below depicts menus the user passes through to access the
craftshell.
Site Dependencies
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standard Craftshell
Diagnose a unit
Stop a command
Initialize a site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 13
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Craftshell Syntax
Syntax Diagram
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Output Messages
Output Messages
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Craftshell Syntax
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Read-Only Printer
Read-Only Printer
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Appearance
Report Types
Report Access
The HEH and CPFail messages are printed at the ROP and may reflect
problems not displayed on the SDPs. The ROP printouts should be
reviewed at least once a day for CDMA-related messages. To make this
easier, tools will be provided which will allow these messages to be
filtered from the normal stream of ROP messages and routed to a
CDMA log file at the OMP. These tools will also analyze these
messages and sort and summarize them by specific equipment unit.
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 17
Read-Only Printer
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP
SDP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
SDP Sample
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 19
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Poke commands
Craftshell commands
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the summary of page access syntax for the
more common pages and information associations between pages.
TRUNK
Alarm
2132,c
CellSoftware
2100
CELL
Alarm
Index
2150,d
TRKGRP
2130 or 2121
Cell
2131,c
2151,d,t
TRKGRP
2134,c
DS-1
2136,c
LAC
CCU, CE Trouble
DCS
Trouble
Cell Trouble
Relationships between
Status Display Pages
2138,c
CDMA
2152,d,t
TRKGRP
2139,c,n
CCU, CE
Enter commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 21
Inhibiting/Allowing:
Audits
Audit/HEH output
Call processing
Functional tests
Interrupts
Routine diagnostics
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Backing Out of the Menus
Status display pages can be accessed from the OMP or the MCRT.
To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6
keys. To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX System 1000
ECP Access menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To open the display, enter the unique status display page number
(command) and press RETURN.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 23
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To open the display, enter the unique status display page number
(command) and press RETURN.
Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) under
the CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 - Page
Index page and/or 2100 - APX Index page).
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP Layout
SDP Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General Layout
A = Header area
D = Scrolling area
SDP Sample
A
B
Dublin ECP 01
APX-1000 L7.0
SYS EMER CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
OVERLOAD SYS INH
CU
CU PERPH
CMD<
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2130
Site Status
2120
- Cell
APX System
StatusSummary
2131,c
Cell
c Equipment
Status
2121
- System
Equipage Summary
2132,c
- Cell c Software
Status
2133 ,
c
SI
Cell c VRG Status
2133,c,sg,a SII
Cell c VR Status
2134,c
- Cell c DS-1 Unit Status
2135,c
- Cell c LC/SU/BC
Status
2136 ,
c
- Cell c LAC Status
2137,c
- Cell c OTU/LMT Status
2138,c
- Cell c CDMA Equipment Status
2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status
ttyj-cdJ TTY 07
IMS
CELL
CDN
CCS7
LINK
MSC
DCS
TRUNK
2100 - APX INDEX
SYS NORM
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2142,d
TMS/MC
Status
2140
- DCS
DCS d
Status
Summary
2143,d
DCS
2141,d
- DCS d
d DS-1/AFAC
Equipment Status
Status
2150,d
- DCS d TRKGRP Summary
2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status
2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status
2160
- CDN Status Summary
2170
- Direct Networked-MSC Summary
2171,m
- MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status
2180
- CCS7 Link Set Summary
2181
- CCS7 Link Set Specifics
2182
- CCS7 Link Summary
2183
- CCS7 Link Specifics
2184
- CCS7 Point Code SS Status
While there are dozens of SDPs that are available at the MCRT for
analyzing PCS equipment, the following are most useful in analyzing
PCS CDMA Minicell performance. These SDPs are:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 25
SDP Layout
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color Scheme
critical
major
minor
unav
stby
oos
<none>
alarm
act
trbl
Steady or Flashing
Indicators
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
critical alarm
<none> or critical
white on red
major alarm
<none> or major
white on red
minor alarm
<none> or minor
white on red
alarm
alarm
white on red
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 27
IndicatorsBlack Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with black text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
system normal
<none>
black on green
active
act
black on green
out-of-service
oos or <none>
black on red
unavailable
unav
black on cyan
initialization pending
Init
black on magenta
overload
ovld
black on white
diagnose
dgn
black on red
inhibit
inh
black on white
indeterminate
indt or <none>
black on yellow
busy
busy
black on green
warning
warn or <none>
black on yellow
soft fault
soft
black on yellow
DS1 alarm
ds1a
black on red
oos_ex
black on red
WARNING isolated
WARNING or
black on yellow
<none>
IndicatorsWhite Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with white text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
unknown
<none>
white on black
standby
stby
white on blue
trouble
trbl
white on red
equipped
equip
white on black
growth
grow
or <none>
white on magenta
black on blue
initializing
init
white on magenta
idle
idle
white on black
reverse busy
rbsy
white on red
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
assigned
asgn
white on magenta
transient
tran
white on red
guard
gard
white on red
periodic reset
rset
white on red
audit
aud
white on magenta
no_psa (no
pilot/sync/access)
<none>
white on red
normal
norm
white on green
out-of-service isolated
OOS ISOL
out-of-service normal
OOS NORM
arr_oos
<none>
white on red
IndicatorsColored Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with colored text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
off-line
OFL
arr_warning
<none>
blue on yellow
blocked
<none>
blue on yellow
green on black
unequipped
or <none>
magenta on black
red on yellow (Ring)
OTU alarm
otu
red on yellow
camp_on
camp_on or <none>
red on green
LAC alarm
lac or <none>
red on yellow
no_page
<none>
yellow on red
uneq
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 29
APX Index
APX Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 2100 - APX Index page lists all the display pages that are
accessible for the application.
The graphic below is SDP 2100: the APX INDEX.
Dublin ECP 01
APX-1000 L7.0
SYS EMER CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
OVERLOAD SYS INH
CU
CU PERPH
CMD<
ttyj-cdJ TTY 07
IMS
CELL
CDN
CCS7
LINK
MSC
DCS
TRUNK
2100 - APX INDEX
SYS NORM
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2120
- APX System Status
2121
- System Equipage Summary
2130
- Cell Site Status Summary
2131,c
- Cell c Equipment Status
2132,c
- Cell c Software
Status
2133,c
- SI
Cell c VRG Status
2133,c,sg,a SII
Cell c VR Status
2134,c
- Cell c DS-1 Unit Status
2135,c
- Cell c LC/SU/BC
Status
2136,c
- Cell c LAC Status
2137,c
- Cell c OTU/LMT Status
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2140
- DCS Status Summary
2141,d
- DCS d Equipment Status
2142,d
- DCS d TMS/MC Status
2143,d
- DCS d DS-1/AFAC Status
2150,d
- DCS d TRKGRP Summary
2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status
2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status
2160
- CDN Status Summary
2170
- Direct Networked-MSC Summary
2171,m
- MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status
2180
- CCS7 Link Set Summary
2181
- CCS7 Link Set Specifics
2182
- CCS7 Link Summary
2138,c
- Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2183
- CCS7 Link Specifics
2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status
2184
- CCS7 Point Code SS Status
Legend
The APX INDEX gives a summary of the syntax to access a given SDP
and a description of the information provided on that SDP.
SDP code Description
DCS Number
sg
Server Group
VR
Voice Radio
VRG
To view CDMA equipment status for cell 81, enter the command:
2138,81
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP 2121
SDP 2121
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Snapshot Description
The 2121 - System Equipage Status page displays the disposition of the
Minicell sites.
2121 Sample
The graphic below is a sample of the 2121 SDP. Each cell is shown by
the cell site number using the color codes (4-27) to indicate the cell
status.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 31
SDP 2131
SDP 2131
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2131 Sample
The graphic below shows the 2131 SDP. The status of various
equipment groups is shown using the color codes (4-27).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen
The 2138 and 2139 SDPs are the only CDMA specific pages.
The diagram below shows the 2138 Status Display Page.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 33
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen
1
2
Fields
SDP screen number, cell number, and ccc in the upper right corner
2.
CCUs (TCU or ECU) are displayed across the top of the table
3.
With the cross connect of the CRC shelves, any channel element can be
used for the various functions. In this example the psa (Paging, Sync,
Access) and page for each of the Physical Antenna Faces (PAF) occur
as the first six CEs of the first CCU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 35
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen Formats
Reference
Forms are used to access the Access Manager, to view and set the
Minicell operating parameters.
Two different screen formats are used to access the 5ESS-2000 and the
Access Manager:
The RC/V screens are grouped into 28 classes for accessing the 5ESS2000 switch.
The forms of particular interest to the Minicell functioning are as
follows:
ecp
cell2
ceqcom2
ceqface
ceqccu
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 37
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Format
Switch views have a header that resembles SDP headers. The body of
the view lists and displays the value of the switch database fields that
are covered by that view.
The lower part of the view is a craftshell command line.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 39
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Form Name
User Prompt
Screen Number
Form Fields
Help Message
or System Status
Form Essentials
All RC/V forms share the same look and feel, and display three
essential elements:
1.
2.
RC/V Form Fields - place holders that store and display RC/V
information
3.
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Access to any RC/V form requires input of the form name at the
prompt of a data entry screen.
This screen accepts legitimate values for RC/V screen names. Entering
a question mark (?) will list all allowed values.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press Enter
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 41
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Non-Updatable Parameter
List
When accessing the RC/V Forms, the user must declare if they are
going to insert, review without changing, or update information in the
form.
All the translation parameters can be changed and 'updated' through
RC/V screens. The translations will then be downloaded to the cells.
However, some of the translations will not take effect immediately, due
to the need to reset the hardware or due to 'camp-on' for the live calls.
These parameters are classified as 'non-updatable' parameters.
The 'non-updatable' TR (Trunk reservation) parameters eventually will
take effect through TR and/or the MRA audit. It may take a long time,
depending on how soon the audits come up. In addition, the audits have
up to five minutes (camp-on time) to reset the maintenance objects
before killing the live calls for the service-affecting TR parameter to
take effect. It may be possible to unconditionally restore the associated
maintenance objects or stable clear the cell to speed up the update on
the TR parameters. The actions described in the non-updatable
parameter list apply to 'equipped' maintenance objects only. For
'unequipping', the unit should be removed from service. Audits will
change the status of the unit from OOS to unequipped and clear all the
necessary software status fields.
This list can be found on the CD-ROM in the section on CTSO Fax
Flashes and Bulletins.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The sample screen below shows the confirmation screen for the type of
access required on the RC/V screen requested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
First access that form by entering its name at the prompt of the form
access screen. The resulting screen gives the choice of action.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selection is done by entering the proper letter (I for insert, R for Review,
and U for update) at the prompt.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 43
Required Fields
Required Fields
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Some fields need to be populated with legal data before the form can
display the contents of the Minicell data base. These required fields are
indicated by an asterisk (*).
A field that can be changed by another form is indicated by a (+).
Reference
The sample screen below is the ecp screen 1 of 15. Only the first field is
required to identify the executive cellular processor accessed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completed Form
Once the required fields have been populated, the remaining fields are
automatically filled and displayed on the completed form.
The screen below shows the ecp screen 1 of 15 populated with the
setup information for Executive Cellular Processor Identification 1.
Getting Help
At any time, help is available from any RC/V form screen. The help
screens are accessed by entering a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 45
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqccu Form
ceqccu Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 47
cell2 Form
cell2 Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The cell2 form is a multi screen form used to make both hardware and
call processing assignments. Screen formats change with the field
displayed.
Failure to properly update the "cell2" RC/V form when transitioning a
system to a PERMANENT CDMA ON state may cause a loss of
CDMA traffic after a RTR initialization of the ECP.
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqcom2 Form
ceqcom2 Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 49
ceqface Form
ceqface Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqface Form
Getting Information
Overview
Purpose
Two sets of information tools will help you to perform your tasks.
These tools are as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 51
Schematic Drawings
Schematic Drawings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Schematic Drawings
Sample
Drawing Size
Sheet Number
Proprietary Information
Issue Number
Product Identification
Schematic
Drawing Number
F
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE
Coordinates
PCS-CDMA
PRIMARY RADIO FRAME
CIRCUIT
LUCENT
Layout
DECEMBER 6, 1995
DWG SIZE
ISSUE
C2
W2
SD-2R-380-01
SHEET
B42
SD Sheets
SD
Sheets
Sheet Name
Sheet Contains
Index
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Schematic Drawings
SD
Sheets
Sheet Name
Sheet Contains
FSs (Functional
Schematics)
Apparatus Figures
Circuit Notes
Circuit Description
Text description of the circuits appearing in SD2R349 (Note that most SDs do not contain a CD)
CADs (Cabling
Diagrams)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
4 - 53
Schematic Drawings
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Maintenance Overview
Operation vs. Maintenance - - - Reasons for Maintenance - - - - The Maintenance Process - - - - Maintenance Targets - - - - - - Required Maintenance Equipment
Domestic Storage - - - - - - - -
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks
Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment Building and Environmental Equipment - - - - - - Servicing the Heat Exchangers - - - - - - - - - - -
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-13
- 5-14
- 5-17
- 5-20
- 5-21
- 5-23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 1
Corrective Maintenance
Test Equipment Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - Precautionary Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Automatic Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - Manual Routine Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Corrective Maintenance Triggers - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Actions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages
Conditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unconditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - Conditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unconditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Diagnose Command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Stop a Diagnostic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Initialize a Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Switch to Redundant Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - Operational Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose - - - - Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples - - - -
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-36
5-37
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Overview
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perspective
Logistical Issues
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Objectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Activities/
Maintenance Levels
Responsibilities
Responsibilities for maintenance are shared between the cell site (that
reports and analyzes any Minicell malfunction to the ECP), the ECP
(that attempts to correct these malfunctions through software), and the
Minicell technician (who performs any required physical intervention).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Targets
Maintenance Targets
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Facility
Facility
Cabinets
Equipment
Cabinets
Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
Domestic Storage
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Material Required
When EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene) is used, the use of VCI101 is unnecessary.
Storage Methods
There are two methods for storing the Primary and Growth Cabinets;
(sheltered is the preferred method):
Regular opening and closing of the cabinet will require the VCI
Emitters to be replaced with new VCI Emitters. When cabinets are to
be stored over 1 year, this process must be repeated.
Before you beginStorage
Guidelines
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 9
Domestic Storage
Procedure 5-1.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cabinet Damage
There is a possibility of ESD damage.
Wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside of the Minicell cabinet
before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure
the ESD wrist strap is grounded to the Minicell cabinet. ESD
plugs are provided both in the front and back of the cabinet.
Cabinet Damage
The components in the cabinet could be damaged by adverse
weather.
If this procedure is performed outdoors it must be conducted on
a dry day and all steps in this procedure achieved.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
CRC for the VCI-105, and approximately 24 inches from the floor and
2 inches from the CRC for the VCI-111.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Hazardous Chemicals
Danger of exposure to potentially hazardous chemicals.
Personnel involved with cleaning the cabinet must use
necessary personal protective equipment (PPE), and be
trained in its proper use. The most common ways personnel
could potentially be exposed to the materials listed in these
guidelines are through the skin, inhalation, ingestion, and
through the eyes. The information about the required
personal protective equipment required may be obtained
from material safety data sheet (MSDS).
4
Dampen (Do Not Soak) one entire clean cloth with isopropyl alcohol
(IPA). Wipe the area around the PDA and AIP. Repeat this process until
the final cleaning of the surface leaves no residue on the cloth. After the
area is clean of debris, wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth and remove
any excess IPA.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 11
Domestic Storage
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
Tape right and left sides using a continuous piece of tape overlapping
the bottom tape (Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven
Cloth Backing, Color Class 1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Insert VCI-101, between film and cabinet (for use only with MIL-B131, Class 1 Barrier Material).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Place a continuous piece of tape along entire top edge overlapping sides
(Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven Cloth Backing,
Color Class 1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
Unlatch and close cabinet front door and replace side and rear door(s) if
removed.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
Preventive Maintenance
OverviewOverview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 13
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
INTERVAL
Radio/Control Equipment
Clean Fans
6 Mo.
FCC Measurements
Perform Setup Radio FCC Measurements
Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements
Power and Battery Plant Equipment
Radio/Control Equipment
Task List
1 Mo.
1 Mo.
1 Mo.
Storage Battery
Check Float Voltage Alarm
Check Fuse Alarms
1 Mo.
12 Mo.
12 Mo.
Rectifier
Check High- and Low-Voltage and
Rectifier Failure Alarms
12 Mo.
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
Specified in cell
site translations
401-660-101
401-703-203
401-610-135
CIB 117-8A
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
Monthly
401-660-108
Monthly
401-660-108
Lucent Technologies
Power & Battery Equipment
Task List
REFERENCE
The table below lists the tasks to monitor and maintain the physical
condition of the Minicell.
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
Weekly
401-703-300
Monthly
401-703-300
6 months
157-601-701
10
Annually
401-703-300
The table below lists the tasks to maintain the the Minicells
environment.
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
11
Weekly
N/A
12
Weekly
N/A
13
Weekly
401-703-301
14
Weekly
N/A
15
Monthly
401-703-301
15.1
6 Months
401-703-301
16
Monthly
401-703-300
17
Monthly
N/A
18
Monthly
N/A
19
Monthly
N/A
20
6 Months
N/A
21
6 Months
N/A
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 15
22
6 Months
N/A
23
6 Months
401-703-301
6 Months
N/A
25
6 Months
N/A
26
401-660-100
27
401-660-100
Annually
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit path
Receive path
Access channel
Paging channel
Sync channel
Pilot channel
Traffic channels
Antenna
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 17
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
RCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECP
during and after the measurements are made.
Task 6 - Perform and
Review Power-level
Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 19
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2.
3.
4.
To insure the operation of the batteries, check the battery float voltage
semi-annually per Lucent Technologies Practice 157-601-701.
Task 10 - Replace
Maintenance Control Unit
Alkaline Battery
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Smoke
Broken cables
Blown fuses
Verify that heat exchanger and cabinet fans are functioning. If there is
indication of a problem, replace the faulty unit.
Brush, grass, and tree limbs should be removed from the immediate
vicinity of the cabinets.
Cabinet fan screens must be kept free of insects and other debris. This
can be done with a portable industrial vacuum. The screens should also
be washed with a medium cleaning solution or brushed to remove
debris.
The external sides of the heat exchanger cores should be flushed every
6 months with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner. See "Servicing the
Heat Exchangers" on page 5-23 for more information.
The Indoor Primary Minicell Cabinet has an air filter on its front door
and rear panel. These filters must be removed and replaced on a
monthly basis.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 21
Check the service due dates on all fire and safety equipment. Contact a
qualified fire & safety equipment vendor for maintenance as specified
by local instructions.
If the cabinet area is equipped with an air dryer, its operation should be
checked on a semi-annual basis per local instructions.
The fire alarm sensor should be checked and any accumulation of dust
or other foreign debris should be removed.
Verify that all peripheral alarms are functioning properly. This includes
door, fire, AC, and heat alarms. Detailed instructions can be found in
this manual.
The smoke alarm should be tested and verified for its proper
functioning. If it is battery powered, the battery should be replaced
during this process.
All heaters should be tested and verified that they are functional. The
thermostatic control should be tested to ensure that the heaters are
activated at the proper temperature level.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Components
Alarm Conditions
The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the
air-to-air type that provides thermal environmental control for these
electronic equipment cabinets.
The heat exchangers consist of an Ambient Fan, Internal Fan,
Microcontroller, a heater cartridge, and a sheet metal housing. The
Microcontroller, which operates from a 26 V DC source, provides the
logic to perform the following:
Vary the speed of the Internal and Ambient Fans to maintain the
internal cabinet temperature between 0 and 65 C
Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high and
low temperature conditions both on the heat exchangers and the
Alarm Facilities Interface
If the material blocking the air flow resists brushing, wash off with an
appropriate cleaning solution.
Procedure 5-2. Flushing the Core
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
The heat exchanger can be damaged if the incorrect clening
solution is used.
Follow the cleaning solution manufacturers instructions
for handling the solution.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 23
Every six months clean the external side of the heat exchanger cores by
flushing with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner, using the following
procedure:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check to see all the internal components are protected (check that the
door is closed securely)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Spray the cleaning solution back and forth across the upper screen of the
heat exchanger to sufficiently wet the heat exchanger surface
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Corrective Maintenance
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Corrective Maintenance
Description
PCSC Level
These are maintenance actions that do not need intervention at the cell.
These actions are software initiated, such as through a restore
command to reset the cell after an outage.
Minicell Level
Advanced
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 25
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Equipment Maintenance
Checks
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Precautionary Steps
Precautionary Steps
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD Procedures
ESD Reference
Other Precautions
Identify and count circuit packs before removing the pack from its
antistatic packaging material.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostic Tests
Tests that are performed automatically by the PCSC are run in groups,
and they address specific areas of a wireless system.
Test Name
Description
AL
Alarm Diagnostic
BBA
BCR-BIU-ACU Diagnostic
CAT
CCC
CCU
CPI
CPU
CRTU
DCCH
DL
DS1
MEM
Memory Diagnostic
NCI
SCT
Within each group, individual tests are broken into phases, which are
then broken down into segments.
When a test fails, the user interface displays the number of the phase
and segment that failed, enabling the identification of the failing unit.
Locating a Failing Unit
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Interpreting Failing
Messages
For a complete listing of manual call input messages, see the latest
issue of the Lucents Cell Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual, 401-660107.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 29
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Diagnostic Sequence
alw:cell#,scsm
exc:cell#,rtdiag
inh:cell#,scsm
CAUTION
Service Outage
A stable clear will cause service outage for approximately 8
minutes.
Perform the test without the stable clear or run in off hours.
Procedure 5-3. Diagnostic Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stable clear command, to ensure that the Minicell is using the proper
operating parameters
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selective cell site message (scsm) to display the ROP entries that relate
to the Minicell
(Routine diagnostics verify all circuits, and therefore may take over one
hour to complete, thus the value of the scsm for monitoring of Minicell
activities.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selective cell site messages will need to be disabled once the routine
diagnostics have been run.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Systems Response
Once the diagnostics have been completed, the test results (All Tests
Passed (ATP) or Some Test Failed (STF)) are displayed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 31
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of Maintenance
Records
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Sources of Errors
Handling of Errors
Software errors due to, for instance, loss of program control (such
as synchronization signal)
All errors are analyzed by the Hardware Error Handler (HEH). HEH
receives errors from hardware units, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore or
remove) is needed and then issues a request to the Maintenance
Request Administrator (MRA) to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, HEH either takes immediate
recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined
number of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH prints only
an error report.
A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reported
on a per board basis to the ECP. Within each 15-minute period, HEH
reports no more than one alarm for any particular board.
Immediate Action
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 33
Fail/Pass Analysis
Depending on the severity of the error, the MRA will trigger a message
for corrective action, or the error will only be reported on the ROP.
Immediate Action
Single Time-period
Analysis
Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1,
DFI, CAT, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains below a
predefined threshold for a specific period of time, HEH clears the
counter. This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unit
has remained reliable for an extended period of time, its error history
should be forgotten completely. A timer value of 40 minutes is used.
Fail/Pass Analysis
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
That is, the count is incremented each time the error being tracked
occurs on the circuit involved. If a specified number of errors have
accumulated in a specific amount of time, the circuit is usually taken
out-of-service. If the error has not occurred in a given amount of time,
the count will be decremented. If the count reaches zero, the error block
is released.
Reference
For more information on HEH messages, see the 401-610-055, 401610-057 and 401-610-107 manuals.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 35
Maintenance Actions
Maintenance Actions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Allowed Maintenance
Actions
Conditional or
Unconditional Requests
Maintenance Action
Reporting and Control
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Units
Maintenance Units
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Description
RCC*
RCC
RCC
RCC
RCC
RCC
DS1
DFI
DL
SCT
CCC
CCU
CCU
BBA
The table below shows the maintenance unit, subunit (if any), and the
ability to perform a maintenance action.
Subunit Maintenance Action
NULL
CPU
MEM
NCI
CPI
AFI
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
CE
NULL
Obtain
Status
yes
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
* The RCC is denoted as CSC (for cell site controller) in the status display pages.
SCT is denoted as CAT (for clock and tone) in the status display pages.
Yes/No Entries
The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in the table
indicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a maintenance
unit. In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column,
the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unit
column; in the rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 37
Maintenance Units
The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate
whether a remove or restore maintenance action is conditional or
unconditional. See Maintenance Actions (5-36) for further explanation
of c and u entries.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Commands
Maintenance Commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Automatic Recovery
Automatic recovery
Manual intervention
Manual Intervention
Inhibiting/Allowing
Audits
Audit/HEH output
Call processing
Functional tests
Interrupts
Routine diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 39
Maintenance States
Maintenance States
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Maintenance State
Descriptions
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
More Common
Maintenance Commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 41
Conditional Remove
Conditional Remove
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Busy CCC
If the unit is a busy CCC or CCU when the conditional remove action is
applied, the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new calls), and the
remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit becomes
idle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval, it is removed
from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, the conditional
remove aborts with no action taken.
Redundant Units
For redundant units, if the unit is in the standby state when the
conditional remove action is applied, the unit is removed from service
immediately. If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in
the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied, MRA
automatically executes a switch before removing the unit from service.
If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in the out-ofservice state when the conditional remove action is applied, the
conditional remove aborts with no action taken.
Out-of-Service
Placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the outof-service threshold limit for that type of unit, as set in translations
(form cell2)
The action is applied on the last data link to a cell site (to remove
the last data link from service, use unconditional remove action)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Conditional Remove
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 43
Unconditional Remove
Unconditional Remove
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Unconditional Remove
Format
Service Effects
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Conditional Restore
Conditional Restore
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of Restore
Command
The restore maintenance action can be applied to units that are in the
out-of-service, active, or standby state. Except for a unit that is already
out-of-service or in the growth state, the first step in a conditional
restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of a conditional
remove. Therefore, all the restrictions associated with a conditional
remove are also associated with a conditional restore.
Restoring Out-of-Service
Units
Restoring Units in a
Growth State
Conditional versus
Unconditional Restore
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 45
Unconditional Restore
Unconditional Restore
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Unconditional Restore
Format
Conditions Applying to
Restore Requests
References
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnose Command
Diagnose Command
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of Diagnose
Command
For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active state, but the
mate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no action taken.
In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC
or CCU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose maintenance
action for an active CCC or CCU is the automatic execution of a
conditional remove.
Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics, the unit is left in the
out-of-service state except for a unit in the growth state. A unit initially
in the growth state remains in the growth state. The diagnostic test
results (pass, fail) are reported to the ECP.
Diagnosing a CSC
A diagnostic test can be called for the whole CSC (in which all
controller circuit boards are tested), or a diagnostic test can be called
for an individual controller circuit board (for example, CPU).
For more information on the diagnose maintenance action, refer to the
DGN CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages
manual (401-610-107).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 47
Stop a Diagnostic
Stop a Diagnostic
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless the
unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. Upon terminating a diagnostic test for
one of those units, MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just prior
to the diagnostic request (out-of-service, growth, or active).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Initialize a Site
Initialize a Site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Format
To request a
Enter...
INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE];SW
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 49
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Redundant Units
References
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Operational Status
Operational Status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operational Status
Command SDP Reporting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 51
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
State qualifier A message from the MRA to indicate the reason why a
particular unit is in an out-of-service state.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples
Out-of-Service Qualifiers
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5 - 53
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Overview
Purpose
6-11
- 6-12
- 6-14
- 6-15
- 6-17
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 1
Diagnostics
Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces - - Alarms, Physical Display - - - - - - - - Alarm Display Description - - - - - - - Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms Detailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm
User Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-30
6-31
- 6-32
- 6-33
- 6-34
- 6-35
- 6-36
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
This section describes the system fault indicators and the types of tools
used to identify the faults.
PCS CDMA Minicells support two complementary types of fault
detection and recovery mechanisms:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 3
Diagnostics
Fault Detection
Fault Detection
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Alarm Indications
Diagnostic Tests
Type of Housekeeping
Software
Board self-tests
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Related Documents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 5
Diagnostics
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active.
Running functional tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine
functional tests) is a way of checking the integrity of the cell site
transmit and receive paths. The frequency of routine functional tests is
specified in the cell site translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing,
the exact time of day cannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail)
are reported to the ECP.
Transmit path
Receive path
Access channel
Paging channel
Sync Channel
Pilot Channel
Traffic Channel
Pilot Level
Antenna.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Software Audits
Software Audits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Audits
Related Documents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 7
Diagnostics
Software Asserts
Software Asserts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Handling Asserts
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the
Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. The HEH
receives error reports from hardware units, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (remove,
restore) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, either the HEH takes
immediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a
predefined number of times before taking action. For other errors, the
HEH sends only an error report to the ECP.
The cell site will autonomously report four types of errors to HEH to
allow appropriate diagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error types
are hardware errors, program-control errors, radio-channel errors, and
mobile station errors.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 9
Diagnostics
Related Documents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 11
Diagnostics
Alarm Overview
Alarm Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Latched Alarms
Severity
Alarm Reporting
Alarms are the first indication of cell site trouble, indicating one of the
following conditions:
Software failure
Hardware failure
User-defined condition
Equipment
Alarm State
External Alarm 6
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 5
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 4
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 3
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 2
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 1
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 0
Minicell Primary
Switchable
Generator Alarm
Normally Open
CSU Alarm
Normally Open
Minicell Primary
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Overview
10
Door / Intrusion
Alarm
All
11
Normally Open
12
Battery Discharge
Alarm
Battery Cabinet
Normally Open
13
Growth 0 Alarm
Minicell Growth
Normally Open
14
Sage Alarm
Minicell Primary
Normally Open
15
External Alarm 7
Minicell Primary
Normally Open
16
Normally Open
17
AC Fail Alarm
Normally Open
Power Cabinet
Normally Open
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 13
Diagnostics
Alarm Scanning
Alarm Scanning
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicells frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the
AFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).
The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment
sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports both
amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to
the AFI. LAC alarms are used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit
(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Types
Alarm Types
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Amplifier Alarms
Frame Alarms
User Alarms
2.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 15
Diagnostics
Alarm Types
2.
Spare alarms
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
Alarm Functions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The alarm inputs to the AFI are accessed at AFI1 slot (P20) via an
AYD5 connector paddle board. The alarm signal names originate from
the Series II Macrocell project, and may be used for different purposes
in the Minicell.
RFGEN1
PRFAL5L
PRFAL4L
PRFAL3L
Cabinet Blower
PRFAL2L
PRFAL1L
PRFAL0L
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 17
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
PRSHAL4L
PRSHAL3L
PRSHAL2L
PRSHAL1L
PROCPWRL
G0FAL5L
Not used
G0FAL4L
G0FAL3L
G0FAL2L
G0FAL1L
G0FAL0L
G0SHAL5L PCU2
G0SHAL4L PCU1
G0SHAL3L CRC2
G0SHAL2L CRC1
G0SHAL1L CRC0
G0SHAL0L Not used
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
and external user alarms. The 18 alarms are as follows (with quantity in
parenthesis):
Locating Rack-Mounted
Growth Alarms
CRTU (1)
External User Alarm 7 is used for Generator Fail when equipped with a
generator. This alarm is not programmable and is Close ON Alarm.
External User Alarm 7 may be used for other purposes if the
installation does not include a generator cabinet.
Alarm locations for rack-mount growth cabinets correspond to the
carrier for the equivalent growth cabinet. For example, alarms for a
minicell with a primary cabinet, Growth 1, and RG2 (rack growth 2):
Growth 2 (carrier 3) CRC alarms are for the right side of RG2.
Growth 3 (carrier 4) CRC alarms are for the left side of RG2.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 19
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ACB (located in the Primary Cabinet CTU Shelf) formats alarms
collected from the CTU, RUs and PCUs before sending them to the
Alarm FITS Interface (AFI) board (located in the RCC shelf).
The alarm signals reported to the AFI are shown in the following table,.
Subassembly
Alarms
Alarm Type
Leads
RU Alarms
RX_ALmn (n = 1 to
6)
Primary Cabinet 3
CTU Alarms
Synthesizer out-of-lock, DC
Over Current, Over
Temperature, and Malfunction
Alarm
TX_ALMn (n = 1 to
3)
Growth I
Cabinet CTU
Alarms
TX_ALMn (n = 4 to
6)
DCI_ALMn (n =
1.2)
Two types of alarm status information are sent to the AFI Interface:
LAC alarms
The following two paragraphs describe the interface for LAC alarm
and cabinet alarm message reporting.
LAC Alarm Interface
Frame alarms cover the two PCUs located in the same CTU shelf in the
primary cabinet. These alarms are reported to the AFI circuit pack
located in the RCC via a cable assembly connected to the CTU shelf
backplane.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit
ACB
ACB
ACB
RU 1
RU 2
RU 3
RU 4
RU 5
RU 6
CTU
LED
Color
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
Description
LED
State
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Faceplate
Text
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
ALM4
ALM5
ALM6
ALM/AMP
Alarm Condition
Description
Power-up/self-test failure
Busy mode/Stand-by mode
Passed all tests and/or is active
RU 1 Failure/Alarm
RU 2 Failure/Alarm
RU 3 Failure/Alarm
RU 4 Failure/Alarm
RU 5 Failure/Alarm
RU 6 Failure/Alarm
CTU Failure/Alarm
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM
RU
AMP
RST
A group of three LEDs (ALM, STBY, ACT) that depict the status
of the ACB
A lone LED (ALM AMP) that reports on the status of the CTUs.
The ACBs three LEDs are red, yellow, and green. ACB LEDs are
displayed at power-up or when there is an RU receiver failure. A red
LED indicates an alarm state, a yellow LED a standby state, and a
green LED an active state. All RU and ALM AMP LEDs are red.
Faceplate text is used to distinguish the ACB and RU LEDs from one
another. An illuminated RU LED indicates that the RU is bad. If there
is a CTU failure, the ALM AMP LED is displayed and latched.
System Alarms
System alarms are always sent to the Read-Only Printer (ROP) and
some are displayed on the SDPs.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 21
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
State/Setting
Description
S1
Push-button
(momentary)
Unit Reset
Pressed
In
Pressing
actuator resets
unit
Not
Applicable
S2
Rotary
3 Sector
Omni
DS 3,
(ACT)
4 to F
Unassigned
Select customers
licensed frequency
band for
synthesizer
programming
0 to 9
Unassigned
A to F
Band A to Band
F
Minicell
4 to F
Unassigned
DS 5,
(ALM1)
0
1
None (Normal
Operation)
DS 2,
(STBY)
Diagnostic
3 to F
ICT mode
S3
S4
S5
Type
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Failure LED
State/Setting
NA
Function
Reference
Designation
The LEDs can also indicate an error when there is a mismatch between
the cell operating parameters set in translation and the physical settings
of the switches on the ACB. The right column of the table below shows
LED failure display for invalid switch settings.
Provision #
DS 4,
(ALM0)
Unassigned
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
There are two alarm conditions for the TX_UP. The description of
these conditions are listed in the table below.
Condition
LED
Causes
State
Alarm
Red
Synthesizer in out-of-lock
condition or Alarm from the
Amplifier
No-Alarm
Green
System alarms
System alarms are always sent to the read-only printer (ROP) and some
are sent to the SDPs, as discussed in Unit 3. The following table
summarizes this:
ALARM
SDP NUMBER
NO
2136
2136
NO
2131
2131,2138, 2139
2136
NO
NO
2131, 2138
CTU Alarms
2131, 2136
CCU
CCC
SCT
2131 AS CAT
RECEIVE UNITS
2131, 2136
BCR
2138, 2139
ACU
2138, 2139
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 23
Diagnostics
ALARM
SDP NUMBER
BIU
2138, 2139
ACB
Primary Frame Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter
CB
AIM 1
TERM. NO.
PUNCH
DOWN
(OSP)
17
22
16
21
15
20
14
19
13
18
12
17
11
16
Maj 7
10
15
Maj 8
14
CSU Alarm
Maj 9
CB8
Maj 10
13 Grw-Frm
Min 11
CB10
Maj 12
Min 13
CRTU
Min 14
CB12
Min 15
Min 16
12
Maj 17
11
Min -
CB1
LEVEL
S2 USER
ALARM
BIT
OFFSET
2131,2138, 2139
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
BIT
CB
AIM 1
TERM. NO.
PUNCH
DOWN
(OSP)
Min -
CB2
Min -
CB3
Maj -
CB4
Min -
CB5
CB13
Min -
CB9
Min -
CB10
Min -
CB10
Maj -
CB14
Min -
CB18
Min -
CB20
LEVEL
S2 USER
ALARM
OFFSET
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 25
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function
Amplifier alarms report on CTU power loss and Receive Unit failure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function
Low output voltage alarm if the output voltage falls below 97% of
nominal (RED LED turns on, relay contacts close).
The PCU used in the CTU shelf has the following alarms:
1.
2.
The CTU shelf PCU alarms are connected to the ACB via internal
backplane traces. The ACB will then invert this signal to logic low for
alarm condition and outputs to the AFI via a CTU shelf backplane
connector.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 27
Fan Alarms
Diagnostics
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
User Alarms
User Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
User Alarm
Name
Number of Function
Alarms
CSU
1
Heat Exchanger 3
Intrusion
Power Cabinet
1
5
External --User 8
defined
Miscellaneous Alarms
Other alarms are reported to the Switch, and provide visible indication
on an associated LED display:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 29
Diagnostics
User Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Introduction
2.
3.
4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Performance Measurement
Performance Measurement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Types of Performance
Testing
Performance Testing as a
Diagnostic Tool
Definitions of Tests
Configure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 31
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Automatic Recovery
The cell site automatic fault recovery software consists of two main
software subsystems: the HEH and the maintenance request
administrator (MRA). The MRA subsystem not only responds to
external requests from the MSC, but also responds to internal requests
submitted by other software subsystems such as HEH. MRA handles
requests to return information about the cell site, to remove (deactivate)
cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site equipment, to perform
diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on.
Throughout the maintenance process, the maintenance status of
equipment (hardware) is recorded, and the maintenance status of
equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP
requests an update. The status of cell site equipment is displayed at the
ECP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble Indicators
There are various sources from which the technician can learn about
the health of the PCS cellular system. Those sources include:
Alarms
Subscriber complaints
Drive testing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 33
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Report Types
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
RF Call Trace
RF Call Trace
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Handoff studies
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
6 - 35
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
OCNS Uses
Requirements
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Overview
Purpose
In many instances, diagnostic results indicate that more than one unit
may be at fault. This is often true in circuits involving both digital and
RF functions. Some corrective action situations involve replacing one
or more circuit cards within a group of two or three suspect cards. For
this situation, the most effective corrective action is to replace each
card and rerun the diagnostic test until the trouble is cleared.
There are other cases in which corrective action is not so
straightforward, because diagnostic definition is lacking and/or suspect
units are not easy to replace. To support this type of trouble-locating
situation, where possible, trouble isolation procedures must be used.
Contents
7-3
- 7-4
- 7-6
- 7-9
- 7-11
- 7-13
- 7-16
- 7-18
- 7-21
- 7-22
Performance Measurements
7-24
Service Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
Plant Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 1
Troubleshooting
Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements
Subscriber Complaints - - - - - - - - - - - - CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test - - - - - Call Setup Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Alarm Test Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-33
7-36
- 7-37
- 7-38
- 7-40
- 7-41
- 7-44
- 7-45
- 7-49
- 7-56
- 7-59
- 7-61
- 7-65
- 7-67
- 7-68
- 7-71
7-72
- 7-73
- 7-76
- 7-79
- 7-82
- 7-86
- 7-88
- 7-93
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 3
Troubleshooting
CRTU Function
CRTU Function
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2.
3.
Test Sequence
As the CRTU tests the Minicell, the following events take place,
roughly in this order:
1.
2.
While testing, the CRTU evaluates the operational aspects of inservice channel elements and antenna sectors (if not an
omni-configured Minicell) or face (if an omni configuration).
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CRTU Function
The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including
forced handoff. (The term forced handoff means to change to another
Channel Element.)
During the traffic path functional test, the RCC uses the MOST forced
handoff function to transfer the call to idle (active and non-busy) traffic
CEs within the same physical antenna face, or sector, until the call has
been handled by each idle traffic CE available to the antenna face.
After a face is tested the other faces are tested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 5
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
COMPLETED
OC 2
COMPLETED
OC 3
COMPLETED
DEVICE - ttyc
(A time/date/id #)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x = Minicell # 1-222
Response
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
DEVICE - ttyc
(This is just an example. The sequence of CEs will vary)
(a time/date/id#)
M 26 EXC:CELL x FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 2 COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 7
Troubleshooting
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
DEVICE - ttyc
(a time/date/id#)
M 27 EXC:CELL x FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 3 COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
DEVICE - ttyc
(a time/date/id#)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The CDMA functional tests require that the CRTU set up test calls
using the mobile station test (MOST) feature.
The type of CDMA MOST call described in this unit is originated by
the CRTU.
Both the Executive Call Processor (ECP) and the Radio Control
Complex (RCC) in the PCS CDMA Minicell can distinguish a MOST
call type because each has a unique Mobile Directory Number Type
value designated via the RC/V subform.
Relationship of 5ESS-2000
to PCS CDMA Minicell with
CRTU
TO/FROM
PSTN
CRTU Components
MSC
T1 LINES
TDM
BUS
CRTUi
TDM
BUS
T1/E1
DIGITAL
FACILITIES
INTERFACE
MOST
NUMBER
TIME SLOT
INTERCHANGE
UNIT
DIGITAL
FACILITIES
INTERFACE
CRTUm
RF
TX
ANT
RX ANTs
DIV0 DIV1
DFI
SPAN
CTU
PCM
PACKET PIPE
PROTOCOL
HANDLER
FOR VOICE
FRAME RELAY
PROTOCOL
HANDLER
BCR
RSP
CDMA PATH
DEFINITIONS:
CRTUi
MOST
RSP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 9
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After executing the handoff, the RCC can either trigger another forced
handoff to continue the test session or release the MOST call if all idle
traffic CEs have been tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The overhead channel functional test verifies the following for each
antenna face (or sector) of the cell:
pilot
sync
paging
access.
Test Process
The CRTU acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels, known as the
CDMA forward control channels, by locking on a particular CDMA
center frequency (carrier) and pilot pseudo-noise (PN) offset.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
During the final portion of the testing, the CRTU calls the CRTUdesignated MOST directory number to verify access and paging
operation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 11
Troubleshooting
Initiating a Test
Manually requested
2.
Timer-scheduled
3.
RCC-initiated.
Tests in Multiple-Sector
Cell
For a multiple-sector cell, the RCC performs both parts of the overhead
channel functional test on sector 1 (alpha), then performs both parts of
the overhead channel functional test on sector 2 (beta), and so on, until
the RCC has tested all sectors of the cell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The overhead channels are tested with the execution of the FT OC test.
The various aspects of the overhead channels are tested as shown.
To do a pilot, sync, and paging channel acquisition test, the following
actions occur:
.......................................................................................................................................
The mobile acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels for the face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
5
Testing Access Paging
Channel
2
Testing a Forward Path
(Phase 1)
The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect the RSP to that face
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 13
Troubleshooting
.
The CRTU connects the RSP to the transmit path and the diversity 0
receive path.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTU returns the mobile idle state to the RCC, indicating that the
CRTU has acquired the pilot, sync, and paging channels.
The P/S/A CE for the selected antenna face receives an over the air
origination message from the CRTU and passes the message to its
controlling CCC.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
6
Invoking an Overhead
Channel Test
The CRTU releases the call and then releases control of the RSP.
If the cell being tested has more than one antenna face, and if the test
was initiated manually for more than one antenna face, the RCC will
immediately select and begin testing the next antenna face. If the test
was initiated by a timer (a scheduled functional test), the RCC will wait
a certain amount of time before testing the next antenna face.
The following table shows how test results are reported depending on
how the test was intiiatd:
If initiated...
manually
automatically
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 15
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The traffic path functional test verifies that a CDMA traffic path can be
established and maintained through every active and idle traffic CE on
every antenna face, or sector, of the cell. A CE configured as a traffic
channel contains the necessary circuitry to process one CDMA traffic
channel. The RCC repeats the MOST call origination and handoff for
each antenna face of the cell.
The testing time of one antenna face varies from less than one minute
to more than three or four minutes, depending upon how many idle
traffic CEs are available to the antenna face.
The ECP:
1.
2.
3.
4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Queries the status of the CRTU. The CRTU returns the traffic channel
state to the RCC, verifying that the CRTU is in the talk state.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Instructs the CRTU to send a certain 3-digit feature code to trigger the
MOST forced handoff function. The CRTU sends the feature code,
which is received by the RCC as an over the air flash-withinformation message.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Sends the message to the ECP, which sends a MOST forced handoff
command to the RCC.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Writes data pertaining to the selected CE (CE, CCU, CCC, and sector)
into a global data area and then attempts to hand off the MOST call to
the selected CE.
Proceeds to Step 10 if handoff succeeded, or to Step 11 if handoff
failed
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
If handoff succeeded, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and sends
an over the air flash-with-information message to the CRTU. It
updates the global data area for the selected CE with the successful test
result.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
If handoff failed, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and does not
send an over the air flash-with-information message to the CRTU.
The RCC updates the global data area for the selected CE with the failed
test result.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 17
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of the PLFT is to test the power level of the pilot signal to
facilitate performance measurement.
Preparations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure to initialize the data needed for the PLFT feature is as
follows:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
[OPTIONAL] Adjust Pilot Power Verify that the pilot channel signal
strengths are within tolerance at the J4, transmit antenna test point, test
point for each carrier/sector pair.
Lab support may choose to skip this step; however, customers (service
providers) should not. If the cell is not properly adjusted, the calibration
value may be used to compensate for the condition, but the values
reported by the PLFT feature will not be correct.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify Calibration Value Rerun the PLFT for the sector to verify that
the difference calculated in step 5 is now 0 dB. (The difference may vary
slightly between runs.) If the difference is not 0 +/- 1.0 dB, repeat steps
Initialize Calibration Value through Verify Calibration Value.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 19
Troubleshooting
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not
operating correctly.
A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. The
most common reason is damage to the antenna from adverse weather.
Without this test, the operator might be unaware that there is no
transmission from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating
correctly.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allow or inhibit the automatic (scheduled) test via the ALW and INH
commands, respectively.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 21
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This Single Channel selective Functional Test (SC FT) provides the
technician with the ability to evaluate the quality of a call on a specific
Traffic CE (TCE). This feature uses a markov service option which
provides pseudo-random data for testing the traffic channel between
the mobile and the basestation and RF Call Trace capability to collect
Markov data. The SC FT will provide a ROP report with the Markov
statistics collected for both forward and reverse links.
Status
Display
Color (foreground on
background)
camp-on
camp
red on green
idle
idle
white on black
black on green
When executing SC FT, the technician can look at the SDP 2139 to find
out if the CE requested is busy and being camped on. When the CE is
being camped on for SC FT, the SDP will display the CE status as
camp (red/green).
When the CE is in reserve state for SC FT and waiting for a call to
come up, the CE is idle. However, it is not available for normal call
processing to make calls on it. Its status will be displayed as idle
(white/black).
When a call is up on the reserved CE, the CE is considered traffic busy
and its status will be displayed as busy (black/green).
Procedure 7-4.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
where
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 23
Troubleshooting
Performance Measurements
System Performance Measurements
Purpose
Periodically, the ECP collects various measurements from the cell site
and stores them in files at the ECP. The measurements contain
information about system performance including traffic data,
subscriber (mobile) data, and cell site equipment data.
Measurements are unique in that they can be used to identify cell-siterelated faults that cannot be detected by the RCC, such as callprocessing coverage problems and hardware units having partial
performance degradation. As explanation, catastrophic and severe
failures will be detected by the RCC, but less severe failures may
escape detection by the RCC.
Examples of Performance
Degradation
Measurement Types
Damaged antenna
Damaged feeder
Service measurements
Plant measurements
Power-level measurements.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Service Measurements
Service Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Collecting Service
Measurements
Per-Carrier Service
Measurements
Related Documents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 25
Troubleshooting
Plant Measurements
Plant Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Collecting Plant
Measurements
Related Documents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Collecting VCSA
Measurements
Related Documents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 27
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Collecting Power-Level
Measurements
Related Documents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Subscriber Complaints
Subscriber Complaints
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Drive Testing
The customer attempted calls during the down time of the system/
cell.
Trouble Isolation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 29
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Run the CRTUm traffic path functional test. The test should pass on
each channel element (two channel elements per TCU or 10 channels
per ECU.) for all antenna faces; on all CRC shelves. The command
(from the switch) is listed below.
exc:cell x, ft tp
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Make a call (to the switch) using each CCU on ALPHA face (remove
from service the BBA for BETA and GAMMA) of the growth cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step for
the GAMMA face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These tests are not required if the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test
test was completed. Diversity 0 was tested in that section.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place a call (to the switch) using any CCU (only one is necessary) on
ALPHA face of the growth cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step for
the GAMMA face.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 31
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm testing will be done via the switch. The procedure will be to
perform an action (e.g., turn off a CB) on the growth cabinet, and verify
the result (i.e., an alarm going active) at the switch on the ROP.
Enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]
terminal to show the alarms to the terminal as they change state:
alw:cell x,scsm <cr>
x = Minicell #
Preliminary
To override the Intrusion Alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gently
pull the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do the
same for the Power and Backup Cabinet door alarm switches, if
equipped.
At the Power Cabinet, ensure that both the MAJOR and MINOR LEDs
on the CPS ACU (cabinet power system alarm control unit) are
extinguished.
If External User Alarms have been wired and equipped in the
Translations set, place the switch or sensor in a non-alarming or
Normal state.
Verify if the gray protector caps have been installed in the Power
Cabinet.
Alarm Scans
The table below shows the alarms associated with the given circuit
breaker.
Circuit
Breaker
20
18
16
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 33
Troubleshooting
19
17
15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This subsection tests the top rectifier shelf in the Power Cabinet (where
rectifiers were added for Growth Cabinet power).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the first two rectifiers in the top rectifier shelf to STBY Mode.
Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarms 8 and 16.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
remain active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
(There is no need to perform this step on the two rectifiers tested for
Major Alarm.) Verify if each remaining rectifier generates a Minor
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Alarm by placing it in STBY until it scans as User Alarm 16. Turn the
rectifier back ON before testing the next rectifier.
Result: All equipped rectifiers should individually generate User
Alarm 16.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
To create a Door Intrusion Alarm (User Alarm 10), push on the door
alarm switch in the front of the Growth Cabinet.
Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarm 10.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps using the side door switch and then the rear door switch on
the Growth Cabinet.
Result: These also appear in the scans as User Alarm 10.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test all the alarms in the table on page 7-33 by turning OFF the listed
breaker and verifying that the associated alarm comes up at the switch.
After the alarm is indicated, turn the breaker back ON and verify that the
alarm has cleared before proceeding to the next listed alarm.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 35
Troubleshooting
Sequence of Tests
Records
References
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Input Commands/Output
Messages
Even though alarm testing was performed during the factory test and
installation phases of the Minicell growth, it should be repeated again
during integration. The tests will verify alarm continuity of the alarm
paths from the various electrical components to the Alarm and Fits
Interface (AFI) board of the CSC, but they do not test the ability of the
cell software to autonomously detect the fault and report it with the
correct text message string on the ROP.
Each input message required to perform a step during alarm testing
should be entered from an Input Message (craftshell or UNIX
[TIpdunix login]) terminal. In this document, the input and output
messages are shown in table form. Each table will provide the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 37
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm scanning is the subsystem in the cell which detects and reports
alarm messages to the ECP.
Message Routing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See if SCSM is available. The SCSM feature will be active after this
command is entered.
alw:cell x,scsm <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK (Feature is available and activated for the specified
Minicell)
or
FEATURE NOT ACTIVE (SCSM not activated in feature
activation file)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked. An alarm
will report only when its state (OFF NORMAL or NORMAL) changes.
init:cell x:spp as <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK (When no alarms are present)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
op:cell,scsm
<CR>
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 39
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Note
This test covers the RFTG0 Alarm. Procedure for RFTG1 alarm
testing, done at the end of the testing sequence, is provided later on in
this Section.
Proceed with alarm testing BEFORE the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared.
The response will appear in about 15 minutes, when the alarm has
cleared.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<CR>
op:cell x,csc 1
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OP:CELL x CSC 0,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVEOP:CELL x
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
CAUTION
Service Interruption
The cell could be rendered out-ot-service.
CSC 0 should be STBY and CSC 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 41
Troubleshooting
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
STBY
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 43
Troubleshooting
Power-Level Measurements
Power-Level Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Collecting Power-Level
Measurements
Related Documents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Interruption
Switching OFF CB16 will cause the Minicell data links to
drop OOS.
Do not attempt to test CB16 that supplies DC power to the
TN3500B DFI board on CRC 2.
.......................................................................................................................................
[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,[ ]
[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
...........................................................................................................................................................................
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 45
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Service Interruption
The Minicell needs at least one active SCT.
SCT 0 should be STBY and SCT 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3
Remove SCT 0
rmv:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, COMPLETED
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, COMPLETED
Remove SCT 1
rmv:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 47
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED
12
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The CTU shelf is equipped with two +15 VDC Power Conversion
Units (PCUs). Each PCU has a single alarm which is used to report the
presence of any of the following alarm conditions:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedures for testing the CRTU (for ecp release 10.0 and earlier)
converters are outlined in the following.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 49
Troubleshooting
7 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 51
Troubleshooting
Turn ON CB1
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 4
7 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 53
Troubleshooting
7 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 55
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section is for the Fan and Heat Blower Alarm Test.
Procedure 7-15. Testing the Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 56
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Turn ON CB3
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7, BIT 3
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 57
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 58
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
External Alarms
External Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Advance Preparations
To test User Alarms, verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on
the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the closed (leftmost) position. If external user alarms have been wired into the OSP
side of the Lightning Protection Block, it will be necessary to remove
the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User Alarm Cross
Connect Panel.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 59
Troubleshooting
External Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pull out the peg on the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor and
push it back in. (Simulates opening the door.)
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 2
Push in the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor. (Simulates closing
the door.)
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 2
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Growth Radio Cabinet, if one has been
installed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Backup Power Cabinet , if one has been
installed.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 60
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tests outlined in below are for the Primary Power Cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch OFF one of the power rectifiers located in the Primary Power
Cabinet.
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 0
Switch one of the rectifiers back ON (only one rectifier should now be
switched OFF).
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 0
Switch ON the single rectifier that was left OFF in the previous step.
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 0
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 61
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that there are batteries in the Primary Power Cabinet before
proceeding.
............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Battery Damage
A Major Battery Discharge Alarm may appear OFF
NORMAL if batteries are almost discharged.
If this happens, turn ON CB1 in the Power Cabinet
IMMEDIATELY!
6
Switch OFF CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to Test
AC Failure Alarm.
There is NOT a CB1 in the Indoor Power Cabinet. The Main AC
breaker should be turned OFF to test this alarm.
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 62
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Service Interruption
CB22 may be used as an auxiliary power supply for the
facilities equipment (i.e. fiber drivers).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 63
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 64
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RFTG Errors
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared BEFORE testing the RFTG1
alarm reporting.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 65
Troubleshooting
report.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 66
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm testing was done with the SCSM feature enabled, to facilitate
monitoring of the cell behavior. Because this feature generates a large
number of messages, it should be disabled in normal operation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit the SCSM feature on the terminal for the Minicell being tested.
**This must be done before restoring any equipment back into service.
inh:cell x,scsm <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the SCSM feature was inhibited on the terminal for the
Minicell under test
op:cell,scsm <CR>
Result: OP:CELL,SCSM
CELL SITE
###
**The cell under test should NOT be listed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 67
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Alarm Map
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
Min
17
22
Min
16
21
Min
15
20
Min
14
19
Min
13
18
Min
12
17
Min
11
16
10
15
POWER
ALARM
MAJOR Maj
14
CSU ALARM
Maj
CB8 8
INTRUSION ALARM
(All Frames)
Maj
10
13
Grw-Frm
HI/LO Min
11
CB1 6
0
12
GROWTH 0 ALARM
(Growth 0 Heat Exchanger)
Min
13
CRTUm
Min
14
CB1 3
2
HEAT
TEMP
CABINET
EXCHANGER
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 68
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
Min
15
MINOR Min
16
12
17
11
AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 1
POWER Min
CB1 -
CB2 -
CB3 -
REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 1 ALARM
CB4 -
CB5 CB1
3
AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 2
POWER Min
CB9 -
PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
1
ALARM
CB1 0
PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
0
ALARM
CB1 0
CB1 3
REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 0 ALARM
CB1 4
POWER
ALARM
CABINET
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 69
Troubleshooting
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 1 POWER CONVERTER
CB1 8
PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 0 POWER CONVERTER
CB2 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 70
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Use of the Definition File
Alarm Ref
Number
Alarm Level
Usage
ALL 0 0
MIN
ALL 0 1
MIN
ALL 0 2
MIN
ALL 0 3
MIN
ALL 0 4
MIN
ALL 0 5
MIN
ALL 0 6
MIN
ALL 0 7
MAJ
ALL 1 0
MAJ
ALL 1 1
MAJ
CSU ALARM
ALL 1 2
MAJ
INTRUSION ALARM
ALL 1 3
MIN
ALL 1 4
MAJ
ALL 1 5
MIN
GROWTH 0 ALARM
ALL 1 6
MIN
CRTUm
ALL 1 7
MIN
ALL 2 0
MIN
ALL 2 1
MAJ
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 71
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedures
Overview
Purpose
Documentation
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 72
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Prerequisites
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP and DCS OA&M from the AUTOPLEX OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access from the ECP and
DCS OA&M menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Craft Shell from the AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP
Access menu.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
With the 3 AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access menu active, press
the Control - f - 6 keys, in the order shown.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 73
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Close the 2 ECP and DCS OA&M menu using the keystrokes you used
in Step 1. Do this to reach the 1 AUTOPLEX OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The system queries whether you want to exit the Craftshell. To provide
an affirmative response, press the Control-f-3 keys, in the order shown.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX System 1000
ECP Access Menu
The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CMD function is used for poke commands (either as page number
or maintenance commands.). To open the display, enter the unique
status display page number (command) and press RETURN.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 74
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 75
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Connect the terminal to the 25-pin port on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ^D xx:00 ^E, where xx is the CSU number. This exercise uses
CSU 02. This sets up the link to the CSU. The ^D means to press the
CTRL key and the D key at the same time. This input displays the Main
Menu from the CSU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter TC and press the Enter key. This displays the terminal (cell)
interface options.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 76
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
super frame option. After setting an option, press the Enter key again
and the CSU redisplays the terminal configuration for verification.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type NC and press the Enter key at the Main Menu to change the
network interface options (toward the T1 provider). This brings up the
network interface configuration submenu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make option changes in the same manner as you did the terminal
interface changes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ^D. This severs the control link with the CSU. Repeat these steps
if you have more CSUs equipped. Remember to establish each CSU
control link with the input ^D xx:00 ^E.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe the CSU under test. Observe the sequence of LED flashes
followed by the relighting of the green PWR/FAIL LED.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 77
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the serial data cable from the jack on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Ensure that when you are done, all settings for the TC and NC are back
to their original values.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 78
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
Connections for the
HP8521A and CDMA/PCS
Adapters
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Power up both the 8521 and the 83236A for at least 15 minutes.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 79
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the "TESTS" button, middile of upper row. The test (main menu)
screen will appear.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
2.
3.
4.
5.
With the knob, position the cursor to "Card" and press knob to
select. A block appears with "Choices" at the top.
6.
7.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At top right block on the screen, either depress k1 button or use the knob
to position the cursor and select "RUN TEST". The load sequence will
take approximately 1.5 minutes.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
When load and run are done, screen shows Manual Control Main
Menu.
Equipment Functions:
Turning the knob will move the cursor to the desired selection.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 80
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
To enter numerical functions, use the keypad and then press the
knob.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 81
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Test equipment
Background
This procedure enables you to verify the clock source used for CDMA
BCRs by performing the following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 82
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
RFTG Display
RFTG-m-RB
J1
J2
REF OUT
P1
+24V
J3
J5
ALARM
J6
J4
NO GPS
FAULT
STBY
ON
RFTG-m-XO
J7
GPS ANT
J2
REF IN
P1
+24V
J3
ALARM
J5
J6
J4
NO GPS
FAULT
STBY
ON
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that there are no SCT circuit packs in the OOS (out of service)
state by observing the 2131, x Status Display Page for the cell site being
tested, or using the OP:CELL x input message.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe the LEDs on the RFTG-m. If the LEDs do not indicate the
presence of an adequate GPS signal, you cannot perform the CDMA
clock verification test on this cell.
If the LEDs do not indicate a proper GPS signal, STOP; you cannot
continue this procedure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn on the HP test set by pressing the POWER button and allow the set
to warm up for 30 minutes if you have turned the test set off after
exercise 3.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 83
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use a standby SCT board. You can determine which SCT is in the
standby state by observing whether the ACT LED is lit. If lit, use the
other SCT circuit pack.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the SCT circuit pack is connected to the HP Test Set for
the duration of all remaining procedures.
Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard the
information on the next screen).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the CDMA Analyzer screen, select the field labeled SYNTH REF .
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to OFF.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 84
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the HP 85203A, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is lit,
indicating that there is no 19.6608-MHz signal coming from the SCT
board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to ON.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
At the HP test set, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is dark,
indicating that there is an accurate 19.6608-MHz signal coming from the
SCT board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Press the PREV key (top middle key of the test set).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 85
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The cable connection for this test is from the RF IN/OUT on the
HP83236A to SECTOR ONE(S1D0/P) connector in the Hatch-plate
and to include a 30db attenuator.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 86
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 87
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select as necessary:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 88
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure below are the steps to modify the ceqface power
settings.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the terminal access the Recent Change/Verify via apxrcv and access
the ceqface form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 89
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the HP test set record the dbm reading on the screen, ________.
(Should be approximately 39db for 8 watts and 42 db for 16 watts) This
is the nominal power for the transmitter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using a adjustment tool, adjust the power in the BCR for maximum
power and record it ___________.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 90
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Access Recent Change/verify via the apxrcv and access the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: update.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedue below restores the Paging Channel to its original CCU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 91
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Prev menu
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 92
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Rho Measurement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Description
System Requirements
The test procedures can be performed on any CDMA PCS Minicell that
is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center PCSC and
that is loaded with the minimum software release of PXB07.10.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 93
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Rho
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Tune Freq
Result: Will appear as an 850Mhz channel frequency range.
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Atten
20Db
Port
Anl Special
Synth Ref
19.6608
CDMA TB
Internal
PN Offset
Even Sec In
Meas Intvl
0.50ms
Gain
Auto
Anl Dir
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 94
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Analyzer
Qual Event
80ms
100us
Result: A Rho measurement will appear in the top left screen, but
this is not correct because all overhead channels are still active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select:
Main
Trigger event
Delay
Result: At this time the CDMA domain will appear on the screen
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the Terminal access the Craft Shell and make the following entries.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 95
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Add the BBA for the first sector to be tested to the configure session.
This also turns the transmitter off. (Observe that the CDMA DOM will
disappear from screen when you receive the response.)
cfr:cell x,multi bba b;config 150<cr>
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config.
000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
..........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 96
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: M 11 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL BBA
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Once the transmitter has been turned off, the CFR session can be
terminated with the next entry. This puts the transmitter back on the air
with all channels. (Observe that the CDMA DOM screen has all
channels up after the response.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
cfr:cell x,multi;mstop<cr>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 97
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL OICE
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 98
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
The measured Rho value should now be visible on the CDMA Base
Station test set.
The acceptable measured Rho values must be between 0.95 and 1.0 as
defined in the CDMA Base Station Standards.
Record Rho__________ Standard: 0.95 or greater
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
After the Rho measurement has been completed, turn off the CDMA
transmitter with the next entry. Observe the CDMA. DOM is gone from
the screen after the response.
Enter the command:
cfr:cell x,multi bba b;xmitc 301<cr>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 99
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: M 11 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL BBA
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config.
0000000000000000
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the transmitter back on the air with all channels. (Observe that the
CDMA DOM screen has all channels up after the response)
Enter the command:
cfr:cell x,multi;mstop<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 100
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL VOICE
........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M 11 CFR;CELL x MULTI, COMPLETED, ALL TEST PASSED
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
7 - 101
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 102
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Overview
Purpose
Contents
Changing Filters
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0)
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).
Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0) Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) - - - - - - - - Call Processing Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Minicell Cleanup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8-3
- 8-4
- 8-7
- 8-11
- 8-15
- 8-19
- 8-21
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 1
Repairs
Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power - - Remove Meter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Calibrate Additional Shelves - - - - - - - - - - - - - Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations
RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet - - - - - - -
8-50
8-51
8-53
8-54
8-56
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Changing Filters
Introduction
Purpose
This section covers the converting and replacing of simplex and duplex
filters in the Minicell, as well as running Call Processing Tests and
performing Minicell cleanup.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 3
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (Inside Cabinet)
P10
P12
P14
SMA
P11
P13
P15
SMA
P1
P1
P1
N-TYPE
P2 W101 a
P2 W102 a
P2 W103 a
N-TYPE
P2 W104 a
P2 W105 a
P2 W106 a
P8
P9
DSUB (9-PIN) P7
a
P28
P30
P33
SMA
P27
P29
P34
SMA
P25
P32
P35
SMA
P26
P31
P36
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to the
filter panel being removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from
service.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cables listed in the table for the filter panel being replaced.
For a simplex filter configuration, the RX filter is below the TX filter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Damage can occur to the cables.
Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX
cable P1 from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If
the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide in, then
the CTU fan must be removed.
Install the new duplex filter.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 5
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the
Minicell frame.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the
Alarm Control Board ACB and change rotary switch 1 to the correct
frequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the reset RST button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be
done before you start testing the new filter panels.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostics
Call Processing Test
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
CRTU Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
P41
P42
P43
SMB
P38
P39
P40
DSUB (9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
P46
P41
P37
SMA
P45
P42
P38
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 7
Repairs
CTRU Cables to be
Reconnected on Duplex
Filter (Side of Cabinet)
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P41
P42
P43
J2
SMB
P38
P39
P40
J4
9 Pin DSUB
P5
P6
P4
J3
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2 J1
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
SMA
SMA
SMA
P46
P45
P47
P48
P41
P42
P44
P43
P37
P38
P39
P40
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
J6 (-50 RX)
J5 (-40 RX)
J4 (-40 TX)
J3 (-50 TX)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure outlines the steps to replace simplex filters with duplex
filters.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet
using the 216C can wrench.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)
that is being removed. Refer to 8-7.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the
Minicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below the
RU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the alpha face, check the screw holding the power splitter for receive
diversity 0 to see if it is obstructing the installation of the new duplex
panel. This power splitter is mounted on the top, left-side of the front
inside of the Minicell, right below the 15 MHz, 6 to 1, power splitter.
The screw on the right side of the power splitter is the one that could
possibly cause a problem. A shorter screw, (comcode 847743895),
should be provided with the new duplex side panels. If the power splitter
is mounted on a L-bracket, this modification is not necessary.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new duplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three (3)
mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta
filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)
mounting screws are left justified.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use the table
on page 8-8 as a reference.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399
(14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16 torque
wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-8 as a
reference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminations
have to be removed from coupler connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 on the
duplex filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 9
Repairs
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3, J4, J5 and J6
coupler connectors terminated.
If the CRTU is installed, but the Growth frame is not being installed,
leave the J5 and J6 coupler connectors terminated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the
Alarm Control Board ACB and change rotary switch 1 to the correct
frequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the reset RST button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be
done before you start testing the new filter panels.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Diagnostics
Run diagnostics, including the Rho test, to test the working condition
of the cell.
If the Minicell is in service, the following call processing tests must be
performed. If the Minicell is not in service, this section can be skipped.
Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on 8-19.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Duplex
Filter (Inside Cabinet)
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
SMA
P10
P12
P14
SMA
P11
P13
P15
SMA
P1
P1
P1
N-TYPE
P2 W104 *
P2 W105 *
P2 W106 *
DSUB
(9-PIN)
P7
P8
P9
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
SMA
P28
P30
P33
SMA
P27
P29
P34
SMA
P25
P32
P35
SMA
P26
P31
P36
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 11
Repairs
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P10
P12
P14
J9
SMA
P11
P13
P15
J10
SMA
P1
P1
P1
J7
NTYPE
P2 104 *
P2 W105 *
P2 W106 *
J1
(ON BOTTOM
OF FILTER)
P8
P9
J8
DSUB P7
(9-PIN)
The table below shows the CTRU cables to be installed on duplex filter
inside thw cabinet.
Cable
Type
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P28
P30
P33
J6 (-50 TX)
SMA
P27
P29
P34
J5 (-40 TX)
SMA
P25
P32
P35
J4 (-50 RX)
SMA
P26
P31
P36
J3 (-40 RX)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to the
filter panel being removed. Use 8-11 as a reference for the cables to be
disconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from
service.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cables listed in 8-11 for the filter panel being replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-11 as a reference for the
cables to be disconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the
Minicell frame.
Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1
from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filter
does not have enough room to slide in, then the CTU fan must be
removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use 8-12 as a
reference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 13
Repairs
When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16
torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
The P2 W101, W102, and W103 cables are NOT connected to the
newly installed duplex filter panels.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-12 as a reference for the
cables to be reconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the
Alarm Control Board ACB and change rotary switch 1 to the correct
frequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the reset RST button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be
done before you start testing the new filter panels.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostics
Call Processing Test
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Location
gamma panel
bottom
beta panel
middle
alpha panel
top
When facing the front of the Minicell, these diversity 1 receive filter
panels are located on the outside of the left side of the Minicell.
The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the
physical installation of these filters.
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
CRTU Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
SMA
P41
P42
P43
SMB
P38
P39
P40
DSUB (9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
SMA
P46
P41
P37
SMA
P45
P42
P38
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 15
Repairs
RF Cables to be
Reconnected on Simplex
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
BETA
GAMMA RECONNECT TO
SIMPLEX FILTER
SMA
P41
P42
P43
J2
SMB
P38
P39
P40
J4
DSUB
(9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
J3
RECONNECT TO
SIMPLEX FILTER
SMA
P46
P41
P37
J6 (-50 RX)
SMA
P45
P42
P38
J5 (-40 RX)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet
using the 216C can wrench.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)
that is being removed. Refer to page 8-15.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the
Minicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below the
RU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new simplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three
(3) mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta
filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)
mounting screws are left justified.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed simplex filter. Use the table
page 8-16 as a reference. When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the
5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable
connections, use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-16 as a
reference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminations
have to be removed from coupler connectors J3 and J4 on the simplex
filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3 and J4
coupler connectors terminated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the
Alarm Control Board ACB and change rotary switch 1 to the correct
frequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the reset RST button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be
done before you start testing the new filter panels.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 17
Repairs
Run the FER (RX path test) for each antenna face filter that has been
replaced (alpha, beta, gamma).
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Disabling Diversity
Circuit Breaker
Result
The table below shows the Call Processing Test ECP Commands
rst:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rst:cell #, bba
4;ucl
rst:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
4;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
4;ucl
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 19
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Minicell Cleanup
Minicell Cleanup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side and
rear panel locking bolts are tight.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 21
Repairs
Minicell Cleanup
LAC alarms
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Preliminary Notes
Preliminary Notes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
These notes should be read and understood before proceeding with the
calibration.
Coordination Calls
When Calibration is
Required
The procedure is best run from the OMP where simultaneous craftshell
(TIpdunix) and APX/RCV sessions can be run. (Alternately, personnel
at the switch center may use two terminals: one running a UNIX
session, craftshell or RC/V, and the other on MCRT pages.)
For the standard (8 Watt) CTU, never adjust the BCR Attenuation
Factor in ceqface to less than 8 dB except while running this procedure.
BCR attenuation values less than 8 will result in overdriving the CTU.
Double check that the ceqface fields modified during this procedure are
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 23
Repairs
Preliminary Notes
References
The documents listed in the table below are useful references for the
procedures described in this section.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QTY
1
1
Description
VT-100 Terminal Emulator and ECP dialup access (UNIX login)
or a second person at the PCSC to enter terminal commands
Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter
1
1
1
(Optional)
This is needed on installations with the Compact Size Antenna Cable Cover. This assembly does not permit enough room for the attenuator and power sensor head.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 25
Repairs
Test Equipment
The standard CTU can only be calibrated for 8 Watts (Linear Amplifier
Circuit type, or lactype, p and Maximum Power, or maxpwr, 8).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lactype
maxpwr
8 Watts
16 watts
16
CAUTION
Permanent damage to the CTUs will result.
If the CTU shelf fan is removed to check for HPCTU
equipage, it must be reinstalled and operating within 15
minutes.
To determine if the Minicell is equipped with the HPCTU:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the CTU fan to read the faceplate apparatus code (BMT1).
Growth Cabinet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 27
Repairs
Translations
Translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CTU/HPCTU RF Power
Levels
Translations ceqcom2
Amp
Type
Desired
Max Pwr (field
Configuration 162)
lactype (field
75)
CTU
8 Watts
HPCTU 8 Watts
HPCTU 16 Watts
16
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Translations
2.
Remove the CCC and BBA from service for all shelves to be
measured or calibrated.
3.
Remove the foam jumper and connect the power meter and
attenuator to the cabinets antenna interface panel for the first
shelf to be tested.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the BBA again and add attenuator back into the
measurement circuit.
7.
8.
9.
Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are
restored to service.
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 29
Repairs
Translations
16. Remove the tested BBA tested from service, disconnect the meter,
and re-connect the foam jumper.
17. Change the translations back to the normal operating parameters
for each face where translations were modified.
18. Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are
restored to service.
19. Place one test call on all transmit paths measured or calibrated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
ITE6891
FUNCTION
DATA ENTRY
(HP437B)
POWER REF
Reference Calibration
Factor
SENSOR
REF CF 99%
ITE6889
(HP8481H)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Connect the sensor cable between the HP 8481H Power Sensor (ITE
6889) and the sensor jack on the HP 437B Power Meter (ITE 6891).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the Power Meter. Verify that there are no error messages on
the display.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [PRESET] button. Then press [ENTER] to execute the preset.
The unit will display PRESETTING.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After presetting disappears, press the [ZERO] button. The power meter
will display ZEROING***.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 31
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the Power head to the POWER REF jack on the meter. See
Figure 1.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When the CAL*** display disappears, disconnect the head from the
POWER REF jack on the meter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select CAL FAC (press [SHIFT], then [FREQ]). The meter displays the
current value of the Calibration Factor.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Obtain the Calibration Factor for 2.0 GHz from the table on the sensor
head (see Figure 1). Alter the value using the arrow keys as done
previously. Press [ENTER].
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Damage
Sensor head may be permanently damaged.
Place the 30 dB attenuator in series with the head while reading
full transmit power.
.......................................................................................................................................
Use the arrow keys once again to obtain the true loss of the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 33
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Line
RF Interface Plate
Primary Radio
Cabinet
RF Connections
30 dB atten.
Function
Data Entry
Power Ref
Sensor
HP 8481 H
Filter Type
Connection
Description
Simplex
TX - S1P
TX - S2P
TX - S3P
TX - S1G
TX - S2G
TX - S3G
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Duplex
RX/DX S1D0/S1P
RX/DX S2D0/S2P
RX/DX S3D0/S3P
RX/DX S1D1/S1G
RX/DX S2D1/S2G
RX/DX S3D1/S3G
The table below lists the OMNI Primary Radio Cabinet, RF Interface
plate connections.
Filter Type
Connection
Description
Duplex
D0 (C1P)
D1 (C2P)
C3P
C4G
C5G
C6G
Simplex
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Personal Injury or damage to cell equipment
Donot disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the
TRANSMIT state (ACT LED ON).
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 35
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the following command to remove the first BBA from service.
rmv:cell a, bba b;ucl <cr>
Result: RMV:CELL a, BBA b, COMPLETED
Remove the Foam jumper from the RF Interface Panel for the shelf
(CRC) to be measured/calibrated.
Remove only one foam jumper at a time to avoid mistakes upon reconnection.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the attenuator and the sensor head/meter to the proper port of
the RF Interface Panel. The figure illustrates the connections for the HP
437B power meter equipped with the HP8481H Sensor and its
associated 30 dB attenuator. The 2 or 3-Sector and Omni tables list the
transmit RF connection markings of the RF Interface Plate on the
Primary Radio Cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After connecting the attenuator and power meter to the transmit port at
the RF Interface Panel, return the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
The RC/V process will respond with a request for a form name:
Enter Form Name (or ?):
Enter ? to display all the available form names.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter:
ceqcom2 <CR>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 37
Repairs
Navigation Commands
Default entry
'
NULL entry
2.
Type 6 for screen 6 and verify that the lactype (field 75) is as
expected for the CTU/HPCTU on each face.
No changes will be required on this form during this procedure
unless the cell has high Powered CTUs being altered from the 8
watt to the 16 watt configuration or vice versa.
3.
Type 13 for screen 13 and verify that the maxpwr (field 162) is as
expected, for each transmit path.
4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the ceqface screen with the forward link
parameters.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
If attenuator loss is known and has been entered into the power meter as
an offset, skip to Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 39
Repairs
Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link. The screen
number will vary depending on the ECP release; Forward Link
parameters will be on or around screen 8.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain value is 108. If it is not, check
the cluster notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been
made to the pilots gain. The figure on page 8-39 shows typical ceqface
CDMA power control values.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Also record on a note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain
(dgu), the Sync Channel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB);
they must be restored later.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging Channel
Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync Channel
Gain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Only for the HPCTU in 16 Watt configuration, type C, then enter the
field number of the Pilot Channel Digital Gain. Enter 90 into the field.
(For the CTU and HPCTU in the 8 Watt setup, leave Pilot at dgu = 108.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
Type U to update the ceqface form. Form Updated will appear if the
form is properly updated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
This setup will only be performed for this face to measure the test
attenuator. Do not repeat these changes to any other face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the
apxrcv changes will take effect on the
paging channel.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 41
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Requirements
The translations must have been setup for this procedure per Set
Up Attenuator Measurement Signal.
Once the true loss of the attenuator has been measured, tag the
attenuator with the value for future use. There is no need to repeat the
procedure unless the attenuator is dropped or appears damaged.
If you have to turn down the BCR faceplate potentiometer while
performing this procedure, the RF path must be re-calibrated
afterwards.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Restore the CCC and BBA. At this point, the only signal should be:
8 Watt
16 Watt
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the Minicell, turn OFF the AUTO/OFF switch on BCR on the shelf
under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the sensor head/attenuator from the antenna port. Unscrew the
attenuator from the head and place the sensor head directly onto the
same antenna port, i.e., without the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return the BCR switch to the AUTO position and then restore the BBA:
rst:cell a, bba y;ucl
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Subtract the reading just taken from the initial; for example, if the initial
reading were 3.1 dBm and the reading without the attenuator was 32.6
dBm, then:
32.6dB -
3.1 dB = 29.5 dB
The difference is the actual loss of the attenuator. Record this value on
a tag and attach it to the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press [OFFSET] on the power meter. Use the arrow keys once again to
obtain the value calculated in the last step. Press [ENTER]. The power
meter is now ready for use.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Once again, at the Minicell, turn OFF the BCR on the shelf under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Remove the sensor head from the antenna port and re-connect the 30 dB
attenuator with the head to the antenna port. The RF power
measurements can now proceed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 43
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the first physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (Physical
Antenna Face).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link (type 9, for
screen 9).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain is 108. If it is not, check the
optimization notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been
made to the pilots gain. Figure 3 shows typical ceqface CDMA power
control values.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 45
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain (dgu), the Sync
Channel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB), they must be
restored later.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync Channel
Gain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the BCR attenuation
Factor.
Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field for CTU. Enter a value of 2-18 for
HPCTU, depending on the option that was set when configuring the
HPCTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The table below shows the steps to change the Paging Channel Gain
If
Then
16 Watt HPCTU
1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging
Channel Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) into the field.
2. After Sync, BCR attenuation, and paging gains are changed,
press Enter, once again.
1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Pilot
Channel Digital Gain (dgu), Enter 127 into the field.
2. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging
Channel Gain (dgu), Enter 59 into the field.
3. After Sync, BCR attenuation, Pilot, and Paging gains are
changed, press Enter, once again.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Type U to update the ceqface form. Form Updated will appear on the
screen.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Repeat the modifications to the ceqface form for all shelves in the cell
which are to be measured and/or calibrated (Set Up Shelf Calibration
Signals, steps 1 through 10).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear; enter the
following command:
init:cell a:sc <cr>
A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the
apxrcv changes will take effect on the
paging channel.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 47
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the procedure on 8-50 for RF Transmit paths equipped with the
HPCTU set up for 16 Watts.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the shelf under test, find the BCRs adjustment potentiometer on the
BCRs faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,
6 full turns Counter Clockwise.
This step is necessary to prevent the BCR from overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain
38.80 dBm (range 38.75 to 38.85 dBm) on the power meter.
Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 38.80 more than 0.5
dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly
increase (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to prevent
overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit
on the meter may vary).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 49
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
On the shelf under test, find the BCRs adjustment potentiometer (pot)
on the BCRs faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,
6 full turns Counter Clockwise. This step is necessary to prevent the
BCR from overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain
42.1 dBm (range 42.05 to 42.15 dBm) on the power meter.
Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 42.1 more than 0.5
dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly
increase (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to prevent
overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit
on the meter may vary).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Remove Meter
Remove Meter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure lists the steps to safely detach the power meter from the
Minicell.
Procedure 8-20.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
After average power measurements have been completed, turn off the
CDMA transmitter by taking the BBA Out-of-Service. Enter:
rmv:cell a, bba b;ucl <cr>
Where:
a
bba number
2-Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1
4-Beta or Omni - 2
6-Gamma or Omni - 3
8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 4
10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 5
12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 6
20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 7
22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 8
24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 51
Repairs
Remove Meter
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
bba number
4-Beta or Omni - 2
6-Gamma or Omni - 3
8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 4
10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 5
12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 6
20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 7
22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 8
24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9
Repeat all the steps in 8-48 8 watt setup or 8-50 for 16 watt setup,
whichever is applicable, for the next shelf (face or carrier) to be
calibrated or measured.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 53
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Return to the APX/RCV session and update the ceqface form again, this
time updating the form with the original values for the:
Sync Channel Gain (dgu)
Paging Channel Gain (dgu)
BCR Attenuation Factor
Also Pilot Channel Gain (dgu), if changed for the
HPCTU (16 Watt setup).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Update the ceqface form saving the parameters listed above. Keep the
apxrcv session active until all shelves have been restored to the original
ceqface settings.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the
apxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Confirm the operation of the cell by placing one call on each transmit
path of the Minicell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Before the technician leaves the Minicell site, verify that there are no
alarms for the cell. In particular, verify that CB 22 in the primary radio
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
cabinet is ON and check the CTU Shelf fan alarm (SCAN POINT:
OFFSET 7, BIT 2).
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 55
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cell Identification
Cell Name:
Date:
Cell Number:
Technician:
Cell Serial
Numbers,
Primary Cabinet:
Growth Cabinet:
The table below contains fields to store the power calibration data.
CABINET
BB
A
PRIMARY
SECTOR/
CARRIER
CTU/
HPCTU
CHANNEL POWER
#
(dBm)
4
6
GROWTH I 8
10
12
GROWTH
II
20
22
24
GROWTH
III
26
28
30
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 56
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 57
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the airto-air type that provide thermal environmental control for these
electronic equipment cabinets. These heat exchangers limit and
monitor cabinet internal temperatures from 0 to 65 C.
The heat exchangers consist of an ambient fan, internal fan, microcontroller, a heater element, and a sheet metal housing.
Alarm Conditions
Microcontroller Functions
Vary the speed of the internal and ambient fans to maintain the
internal cabinet temperature between 0 to 65 C.
Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high and
low temperatures conditions both on the heat exchangers and to
the Alarm Facilities Interface.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 58
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure lists the steps to perform the heat exchanger rop alarm
corrective actions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 59
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 60
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are no alarms sent to the Alarm Facilities Interface for heater
element failure or loss of 220 VAC. However, a Temperature alarm
will be indicated if the cabinets internal air temperature falls below 0
C. This will indicate a possible heater element failure or loss of 220
VAC, power. In addition, a heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC,
power will be indicated by a LED alarm located on the heat exchanger
panel.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure lists the steps to correct Minicell cabinet troubles when
internal temperature is below 0 or above 65 c.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for bug, dust or
obstructions if high temp is suspected.
Remove obstruction and clean vent screen.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check for heater alarm on heat exchanger panel (for low temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 220 AC breaker for heater power (for low temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 220 AC power connector is plugged into heat exchanger (for low
temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Change controller card if new heater element does not correct problem.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 61
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 62
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the control buttons and indicator lights of
the heat exchanger control panel.
888
INTERNAL FAN
HIGH TEMP
AMBIENT FAN
HEATER
LOW TEMP
UP ARROW
DOWN ARROW
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The cleaner should be sprayed with a low pressure sprayer into the top
exhaust vent following the manufacturers instructions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 63
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Push both arrow buttons on display panel at the same time and hold until
a 2, appears on display then let go.
Result: A 000 will display, then push-up arrow button. This will
set the time duration (in minutes, set to 5) of a full speed blower test
run.
When the test run starts, the alarm lights will all cycle on and off
and the temp alarm indicator will remain illuminated during the test
run.
In addition, the green OK status light will not illuminate during the
test run. However, it will illuminate after the 5 minute test run if the
Heat Exchanger is functioning properly.
If the internal and ambient fans are functioning properly, no fan
alarm lights will remain illuminated during the test run.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
It is also recommended to check for air flow on ambient side top vent
to verify the bottom ambient fan is running during the test run.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 64
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Heat exchanger will perform a self test of fans and control card and run
both internal and ambient fans for 60 seconds.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check for air flow on ambient side top vent to verify the bottom ambient
fan is running during this 60 second full speed test run.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 65
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the
components.
Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and
turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the top fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 14 pan
head screws securing the cover.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unfasten the three captive screws and remove the fan shroud from the
heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Locate the control circuit card on the top right side of the heat
exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unfasten the four captive screws securing the control card to the
heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 66
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the 220 VAC power spade leads one at a time transferring
them to the corresponding lug of the new control card heater relays.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new control card in the heat exchanger with captive screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
2.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the fan shroud assembly and secure the three captive screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the top fan cover on the heat exchanger and install the two front
cover screws connecting the cover to the fan shroud first.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
13
Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 67
Repairs
2.
The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and
adjust to half speed.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 68
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the
components.
Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and
turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the air grill on the heat exchanger by removing all 6 pan head
screws securing the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the four screws attaching the heater cartridge to the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new heater cartridge in the air grill securing it with the four
screws. Tighten the screws securely.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 69
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the air grill and secure with the pan head screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed.
2.
The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and
adjust to half speed.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 70
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the
components.
Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and
turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the bottom fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 19
pan head screws securing the cover plate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unfasten the four pan head screws connecting the fan bracket to the heat
exchanger. Remove the fan/bracket assembly from the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unplug the weather tight fan connector from the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the four screws attaching the fan to the fan bracket.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the new fan to the fan bracket assembly securing it with the four
pan head screws. Tighten the screws securely.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 71
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the cable clamp on the back of the fan bracket assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the fan cable connector back to the mating weather tight
connector inside the fan box of the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
Spin the fan slowly by hand checking for interference and adjusting the
fan bracket if necessary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Install the bottom fan cover and secure it with all 19 pan head screws.
Fully and evenly tighten all the pan head screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
14
15
Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed.
2.
The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and
adjust to half speed.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 72
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Island Cell
Overview
Objectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 73
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Description
Questions
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 74
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
NVM Procedures
Overview
Purpose
NVM Procedures
2.
3.
A Stable Clear of the cell at the end of the NVM procedure is not
needed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 75
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify generic:
OP:CELL,GENERIC
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove CSC 0:
RMV:CELL #,CSC 0;UCL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 76
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
NVM'd)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 77
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 78
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
NVM'd)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CRTU:
DNLD:CELL #,CRTU
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Routine diagnostics:
ALW:CELL #,RTDIAG
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Functional tests:
ALW:CELL #,FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL}
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
8 - 79
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 80
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
Purpose
Contents
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-10
- 9-11
- 9-13
- 9-14
- 9-15
- 9-16
9-19
- 9-20
- 9-22
- 9-25
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 1
Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Required Material and Information - - - - - - - - Preliminary Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - TTLNA Physical Installation - - - - - - - - - - Transmit Power Calibration Procedure - - - - - - Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA - - - - - - - - Minicell Cleanup and Reboot - - - - - - - - - - TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests - - - - - Close Up the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PDU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cable Routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet - Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet
Bias T Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Identifying Faults in the MAU - - - - - - - - - - Component Replacement and Repair Preparations Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing - - - - - - - - Preparing an MAU for Mounting - - - - - - - - - Replacing a Failed MAU - - - - - - - - - - - - Replacing a Failed PDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9-28
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-37
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-45
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-54
9-56
9-60
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
How to Upgrade?
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Upgrade Procedure
Preliminary preparation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Baselining the cell (i.e., recording the state of the cell and its operating
parameters) before the upgrade
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Testing that the upgrade is effective and that the cell is operating
properly
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Baselining the Minicell after the upgrade, to record the new operating
parameters
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Hardware
Soaking a Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical Change
Logical Changes
DSO
DSO
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
The diagram below depicts the relationship between the RC/V screens,
the packet pipe, and the antenna faces. Each antenna face (alpha, beta,
and gamma) must be associated with a series of DS0 channels on the
pptm RC/V screen to define a packet pipe.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular
Screen 1 of 1
System
ALPHA
BETA
DL1
BETA
GAMMA
Alpha Face
Associated DSO Channels
Beta Face
Associated DSO Channels
Gamma Face
Associated DSO Channels
DL0
CL3805 L9V7 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Baselining a Minicell
Baselining a Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Components Involved
Routine diagnostics
Once these tests are completed, it may be of value to verify the integrity
of the cell, by looking at the SDPs that reflect the configuration of the
cell, as shown in the table below.
SDP Page Number
Title
SDP 2121
SDP 2131
SDP 2132
SDP 2134
SDP 2138
SDP 2139
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 7
Baselining a Minicell
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Required Equipment
How to Order
Qualcomm Ordering
Information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physically remove the TCUs from the shelf and take them out of the
Minicell. See page 9-14 for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-NVM the CCCs, and verify that the download is valid. See page 916 for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 11
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Upon completion of these broad steps, the cell will be operational with
ECUs. The cross references note the steps with more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Cabinet
BBA Numbers
Value to be
entered
Primary Cabinet
2,4,6
1,1,1
Primary Growth I
8,10,12
2,2,2
ceqcom2 Screen
The diagram below shows the ceqcom2 screen with emphasis shown
on the SubMem field where channel pooling is enables.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2)
System
Cell 90
Screen 13
Primary Cabinet
BBA:
2,4,6
SubMem: 1,1,1
BBA
BBA BBA CDMA
Stat
Stat
Type
Carr
153) BBA 154) BBA 155)
156)
157)
[1] 1
u
2
e
FULLSET 1
[2] 3
u
4
e
FULLSET 1
[3] 5
u
6
e
FULLSET 1
Max LMT/CATV
Pwr Max Pwr
163) 164)
[1] 008.0 ___
[2] 008.0 ___ Channel
[3] 008.0 ___
CDMA Base
Chanl Class
158) 159)
450
JTC
450
JTC
450
JTC
Screen 13 of 17
LAC Phy
ID
Ant
160) 161)
29
1
30
2
31
3
Sub
Mem
170)
1
1
1
Screen 14
Growth Cabinet
BBA:
8,10,12
SubMem: 2, 2, 2
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 13
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Upgrading Sequence
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Note: someone with access to the switch needs to perform the RC/V
updates.
.......................................................................................................................................
Once the ceqcom2 form has been updated, it is necessary to verify that
the proper CEs will be recognized, This is done by verifying and, if
necessary, updating the ceqccu form, placing an e in each entry
corresponding to an equipped CCU and entering a u where the TCUs
were taken out of the cell.
The Minicell upgrade requires changes to the Minicell translations as
shown in the diagram:
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL CDMA CCU EQUIPAGE (ceqccu) Screen 1 of 2
System
Cell Site Number *1) 90
2) CDMA Channel Unit Equipment Status List:
CCC CCU 1 CCU 2 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6 CCU 7
ID# 4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
[1]
1
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
2
e
e
e
u
[2]
[3]
3
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
4
e
e
u
u
[4]
[5]
5
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
6
e
u
u
u
[6]
[7]
7
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[8]
8
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[9]
9
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[10] 10
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[11] 11
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[12] 12
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Equipage for CCC ID# 2,
4, 6,
[13] 13
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
8, 10 and 12 are site
specific.
[14] 14
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[15] 15
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
CL3805 - L9V7.0
tT h
l i
i t
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NVM the CCC for the ECUs, with all CEs removed.
dnld:cell #,ccc x<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the following output message response is seen on the terminal for
a CCC NVMed for ECUs:
CCC NVM
052397-10
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The date reported back (052397) may change on later releases of the
cell generic, but the -10 extension must be there for an ECU. For a
TCU, the extension will be -02.
Procedure 9-4. Restoring the Cell to Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove and restore the CCC NVMed to diagnose it with the following
commands:
rmv:cell #,ccc x;ucl<cr>
rst:cell #,ccc x <cr>
9 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the new ECUs then restore and test the cell with:
rst:cell #,ccc x,ccu y<cr>
where x is the CCC number updated (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12) and y is the
ECU (1 - 4).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Execute the CRTU traffic path functional test and ensure each CE test
passes for each physical antenna face (traffic path) in the subcell with
the following command:
exc:cell #,ft tp<cr>
Result: For several equipped traffic CEs, traffic path functional
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 17
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Purpose
In contrast with the TCU to ECU upgrades, the upgrade from a CDMA
Transmit Unit (CTU) to a High Power CDMA Transmit Unit (HPCTU)
is characteristic of upgrades that can be performed entirely from the
Minicell site.
However, while ECU upgrades could benefit from channel pooling,
this is not the case for the CTUs. In fact, all CTUs within the same
cabinet (i.e., same carrier) must be upgraded at the same time.
Therefore, a CTU upgrade will require that the Minicell be put out-ofservice during the upgrade.
Another difference in the type of upgrade is that TCU and ECU are
plug compatible, making their replacement an easy mechanical task. In
contrast, the HPCTU is thicker than the standard CTU, requiring
significant physical intervention within the affected Minicell cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 19
Preliminary Procedures
Preliminary Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preliminary Procedures
Changing Translations
Translation changes will relate to the change in the transmit power that
is required by the HPCTU.
Leaving a CTU power setting for an HPCTU will result in an increase
in power drain on the Minicell.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 21
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
Powering-down
DANGER
There is a serious risk of burns and other damages.
The BCRs must be turned off before attempting to install the
HPCTU.
1
Power down the BCRs before begining the physical installation of the
HPCTUs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
For installation in the Primary Cabinet, verify that there is power for the
Rear Door Heat Exchanger (cable P2 in the back should yield between
25 VDC and 28 VDC). If there is no power, the installation cannot
proceed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn off all the remaining circuit breakers except for CB4 and CB 14,
which are the breakers feeding the RFTGs.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical Strain
The heat exchangers are heavy units.
Secure assistance before attempting physical installation.
A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs. However, the
HPCTUs are wider than the CTUs. Each piece of hardware comes with
its own installation instructions. Follow them for detailed instructions
to install HPCTUs in a radio cabinet. It will be necessary to do the
following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cooling fan (if applicable) and the CTU card cage.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install the unit directly in the
cabinet, using prescribed tools and torque to avoid warping the HPCTU
circuit pack.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Power the Minicell back up by turning all the circuit breakers to ON,
except for CB8 (CSU) to prevent communication with the PCSC. The
fans should be running.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Functional tests are run to ensure that the HPCTUs are functioning.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check with the Switch that the Minicell can be restored to service, and,
if so, invoke the restore command. The Minicell should boot.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Power setting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 25
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Power Distribution Unit receives 24 VDC from the Power Cabinet
(or non- Lucent power) and distributes 12-15 VDC to the Masthead
Amplifier Units (2 per sector) via the individual antenna coaxial cables.
It also provides individual PDU and MAU alarm signals to the Primary
Cabinet.
The MAUs (2 per sector) are powered by 12-15 VDC from the PDU.
They amplify the receive antenna signals to the Primary Cabinet.
The required Primary Cabinet configuration for the REO, must include
the following items, which are shipped (if not factory installed) with
installation instructions included in the kits:
Refer to the parts list, included in each kit, for individual parts.
Required Primary Cabinet
Internal Parts
The existing Filter Assemblies must be replaced with new ones (having
the new Receive Units) but not until certain FOA tests have been
performed. Refer to the current FOA Test Plan for this product.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 27
Description
Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Diagram
Each receive (RX) diversity path has its own REO System (i.e. each
face has two REO Systems) which consists of seven principle
components.
The diagram below shows the REO System components.
The table below lists the seven components of the tower top low noise
amplifier.
Item
Description
Remarks
Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU) Mounted on the antenna tower near the RX Antenna
- Lucent
element
MAU Mounting Bracket - Lucent Attaches the MAU to the antenna tower structure
PDU - Lucent
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Description
Item
Description
Remarks
Tower Jumper Cable - Customer Coaxial RF jumper between the MAU connector and the
Tower Cable that runs down to the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 29
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Required Equipment
Equipment required for High Power CTU Upgrade along with the
RHO, FER, and Transmit Power Level Adjustment Procedures are
required for the TTLNA installation test.
An ITE 5632 / 6379 / 6928 multimeter is recommended for TTLNA
installation testing.
Required Information
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preliminary Procedures
Preliminary Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Remove Cell From Service
Preliminary Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
TTLNA Installation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
On the CTU shelf of the cabinet that was upgraded, locate the Alarm
Control Board (ACB, the packs code is either BLB1 or BLB2).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using a pen, press the reset (RST) switch on the ACB. This will reset
the LAC alarms reported by the ACB to the RCC.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
After a couple of seconds, all the ACB LEDs should illuminate then
extinguish, except for the Active (ACT) LED.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Procedure 9-10.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Interruption
The HPCTU power level must be set to 16 watts to ensure
link balance.
If the customer desires a power level other than 16 watts, contact
the Columbus CTSO Methods and procedures group at 1-800356-8574 or, for international locations, (614) 860-3760.
Damage the lightning protectors
Use of excessive force can damage the lightening
protectors..
Take care not to place any additional stress on the DC Bias Ts.
when attaching / removing the 30dB Attenuator.
.......................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 33
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Run the RHO Test for each sector / carrier that was upgraded to an
HPCTU. Verify the RHO measurement is 0.95 or greater for each
transmit path upgraded to HPCTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the FER test on each sector / carrier and diversity that was
changed for the TTLNA.
FER must be 0% and the path loss must be less than 56.0 dB for a
Primary Cabinet or less than 62.0 dB for a Growth Cabinet for each CE
under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the path loss exceeds the allowed value, recheck the test cable
connections and repeat the test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Only test a single channel element for each antenna sector and each
diversity.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify all test equipment is removed from the Minicell, and any
equipment removed for testing is replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Call the switching center and see if the cell tech or engineer is ready to
boot the cell site to the switch. Do not proceed until ready.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ask the cell tech to restore the datalinks and alarm reporting. Once the
facilities connections are restored at the PCSC, the Minicell should boot
automatically.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When the cell tech or engineer reports the site has started to boot, watch
the primary cabinet for indications that it is booting. After about 20
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 35
minutes the cell should be booted. Contact the switch and verify the
Minicell has completed the boot.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
PDU Diagram
Alarm testing assures that all alarms are connected and working
properly.
The TTLNA PDU control panel is shown below:
POWER ALARM STATUS
ON
MAIN
DC/DC
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
STATUS
OFF
OFF
POWER ALARM
ON
0.5
TTA
0.5
OFF
ON
STATUS
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
OFF
STATUS
ON
TTA
OFF
POWER ALARM
ON
POWER ALARM
ON
OFF
ON
POWER ALARM
OFF
2.0
ON
POWER ALARM
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
STATUS
ON
OFF
STATUS
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
OFF
Before beginning the TTLNA alarm testing procedures, verify that all
appropriate circuit breakers are on and the BCRs (AUTO/OFF)
switches are in the OFF position.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 37
verify the result (i.e., check alarm LED or user alarm going active at the
switch).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on the Standard User
Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the appropriate position: closed on
alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure the Main power switch for the PDU is ON, (the green MAIN
LED should be on). The power switches on the PDU for all the MAUs
(TTA1 - 6) are in the OFF position and all the alarm switches are in the
OFF position.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the antenna jumper from the ANT connector of the bias tee
on the alpha face diversity 1 connector. Turn the power and alarm switch
for MAU1 to the ON position.
Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating an
under-current condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect a 30
dB 25W attenuator to the antenna end of the bias tee. Turn the power
switch for MAU 1 to the ON position.
Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should remain lit, indicating an
over-current condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect the
antenna jumper to the antenna connector of the bias tee on the alpha face
diversity 1. Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the ON position.
Result: The green LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating normal
operating condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat this sequence for each MAU verifying the PDU alarm LEDs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After verifying all the MAU alarms, ensure all the foam jumpers are
securely attached to the antenna port of the Bias Ts and all the power and
alarm switches for the MAUs are in the ON position. All the green LEDs
for the MAUs should be illuminated, indicating normal operating
condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Call the switch and ask the technician to enter the following command
at the craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal. This will show the
alarms to the terminal as they change state:
alw:cell a,scsm <cr>
Where a = Minicell #.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To override the Intrusion alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gently pull
the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do the same for
all open doors. Request the switch to verify which alarms are active.
If the ...
Then...
Scan reported does not match the table. Verify the Offset/Bit. If the
Offset/Bit matches, the alarm
test passes. Alarm scan reported
may change with different
generic loads.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Disable both power supplies by turning off the main power switch on the
PDU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Active.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 39
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Normal.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Turn any one of the MAU power switches to the OFF position. The red
LED should illuminate for that MAU indicating an alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
Verify from the ECP that only the PDU alarm is Active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Return the MAU power switch to the ON position. The green LED
should illuminate indicating Normal operation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
17
18
After the alarm tests are complete, ask the technician at the switch to
enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]
terminal. This will inhibit the command allowed earlier.
inh:cell a,scsm <cr>
Where a = Minicell #.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
19
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Complete this procedure to close the cabinet and secure it against the
outside weather conditions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify no manuals or paperwork are blocking the cooling duct above the
circuit breakers in the radio cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side and
rear panel locking bolts are tight.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified. Turn on the Main
power switch in the PDU and all equipped MAU power and alarm
switches.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure it, if equipped.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 41
MAU Description
MAU Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAU Diagram
Power
The MAU is mounted on the antenna tower near the receive antenna
and is a rectangular enclosure which houses all of the following:
Lightning protectors
The diagram below shows the coax connectors and the ground
connections on the side of the unit.
The MAU operates on D.C. power (+12 VDC) supplied by the PDU via
the coaxial cable.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PDU Description
PDU Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The diagram below shows the housing, openings, and location of the
PDU.
COVER
LOCKW ASHER
DRILLED SPANNER
SCREW
PO
WE
RC
AB
IN E
GASKET
INSULATING
BUSHING
4 PLACE S
CHASE NIPPLES
(INSIDE OF
POW ER CABINET)
SEALING RING
(OUTSID E OF
POW ER CABINET)
LOCKNUTS
G1/G2
MI
PULL BOX
GASKET
P
N IC C S
EL CDM
LC A
AB
IN E
COVER
LOCK WASHE R
DRILLED SPANNER
SCREW
G-2
PLUG
ANTENNA CABLE
COVER
The diagram below shows the DC cable routing from primary cabinet
to PDU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 43
PDU Description
3RZHU &DELQHW
3XOO %R[
&RQGXLW WR
3ULPDU\ &DELQHW
RI
3ULPDU\ &DELQHW
$QWHQQD &DEOH
&RYHU %R[
7HUPLQDO %ORFN
+RXVLQJ
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Cable Routing
Cable Routing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the routing cable through clamp and
removal/installation of tape gasket.
CABLE CLAMP
TAPE GASKET
CABLES
(TOP VIEW)
SECURE SCREWS AFTER TAPING
NOTE: SEAL ANY GAPS WITH
RTV.
TAPE GASKET
(PUSH INTO CLAMP
AND SEAL)
CABLE CLAMP
(SIDE VIEW)
Circuit Breaker
Primary
Radio Cab.
Growth
Cab. # 1
Growth
Cab. # 2
1-5
6 - 10
11 - 15
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11
Power Cab.
Fan Unit
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 45
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The diagram below shows the primary cabinet alarm cable entry at
antenna interface plate.
GN D
6
L1
L2
5
240 AC
3
DC FE E D
1
PW R
CAB
AL A R M S
Se e Note
T 1/ E1
E XT
USE R
AL A R M S
6 Gro un d
Co nn ect ion s
The diagram below shows the location of the lightning protection block
in the primary cabinet.
TO A IM
GROWTH #2
W H EN R E Q D
P R IM A RY
GROWTH #1
W H EN R E Q D
T1 C A BLE O R
IN C O M IN G A L AR M C A BL E
FR O M P O W ER C AB IN E T
P O W E R C A B IN E T A L AR M S
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The table below shows the cable connections for the alarms in the
primary cabinet.
Alarm Functions *
Close/Open on Alarm
or Switchable
Switchable
16
Switchable
17
Switchable
18
Switchable
19
Switchable
20
Switchable
21
Switchable
22
Close on Alarm
Generator Fail
Connect Alarms to PunchDown Block
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 47
GND
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
BLOCK
01
06
11
ALARM
PROTECTION
16
21
1
2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
OSP
CPE
11 12 13 14 15 11 1213 1415
OSP SIDE
EXTERNAL
USER ALARM
CONNECTIONS
16 17 18 19 20 16 1718 19 20
OSP
CPE
21 22 23 24 25 21 2223 2425
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Bias T Description
Bias T Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect Applicable
Antenna Jumper Cables
C O N N EC TO R
W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT
1 /2 R F A N T E N N A
JU MP E R C A BLE S
C O M PA C T A N T E N N A
C ABLE C OV E R
C O N N EC TO R
W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT
G PS AN TEN N A C A B LE
A NTE N N A C AB LES
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 49
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Monitoring
MAU Maintenance
Lightning Damage
The MAU has lightning arrestors but these are not field serviceable. If
the MAU has been subjected to multiple lightning strikes, then its
protection may be compromised and the unit must be replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Routine Cable/Connector
Weatherproof Check
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 51
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Please note that the procedure described below is used for both the
Antenna Jumper/MAU connector as well as the Tower Jumper/MAU
connector junctions.
Procedure 9-16.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weather Damage
It is critical that both junctions remain waterproof ot avoid
damage to the connectors.
Check the seals and re-seal as needed.
To re-seal the cable/MAU connector weather seals:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the Cold Shrink spacer approximately 4-6 inches from the DIN
connector.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Push the Cold Shrink wrap flush against the MAU connector faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Apply silicone sealer at the Cold Shrink and MAU faceplate junction.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 53
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Diagram
Flat Washers
Hex Jam
Lock Nut
MAU Mounting
Bracket Plate
Flange Nut
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assemble the hex machine screws, flat washers, and jam nuts finger
tight on the 4 MAU mounting legs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the MAU Mounting Bracket Plate on the hex head machine
screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Align the screws with the holes in the plate and tighten the jam lock nuts.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the MAU Mounting Bracket and set it aside as a spare. You will
not use this new bracket unless the existing bracket at the tower top is
damaged.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Thread the flange nuts on the machine screw even with the ends of the
machine screws.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The MAU brackets are in place and ready for mounting on the tower.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 55
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
MAU Replacement
Hardware
Quantity
Description
Supplied By:
Lucent
Lucent
Lot
Silicone sealer
Customer
Customer
Customer
Lot
Customer
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 56
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
for two commonly used RF cables are: 1 1/4 for 1/2 Superflex Foam
Jumper, FSJ; 5 for 1/2 Foam Jumper, LDF.
RX
Antenna
MAU
Antenna
Jumper
Tower
Jumper
Loop
J1
J2
Tower
Cable
Since cable loss between the receive antenna and the MAU directly
impacts the system noise figure, the MAU must be mounted within 10
of its receive antenna.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 57
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the ground wire from the failed MAU grounding stud.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Resecure all cables to the tower top using UV-resistant tie wraps.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
9 - 58
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Responsibility
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 59
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF power to the appropriate diversity PDU by switching off the
circuit breaker.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cable connections and terminations from the failed PDU
noting each cable connection designation (J1, J2, J3, etc.).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 60
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check the faceplate of the PDU for a green PDU LED indicating that the
new PDU is operational.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
9 - 61
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 62
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
Contents
10-3
- 10-5
- 10-6
- 10-7
- 10-8
- 10-9
10-10
10-11
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 1
Functional Testing Software Sub-Systems - - Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Asserts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests
Hardware Alarm Scanning - - - - - - - - - - -
10-15
10-17
10-18
10-21
10-22
10-24
10-26
10-27
10-29
10-33
10-35
10-38
10-39
10-45
10-47
10-50
10-52
10-53
Scope
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
CDMA Release 3
CDMA Release 6
CDMA Release 7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 3
References
All of the CDMA Release 6.0 CRTU Functional Tests will be described
in more detail elsewhere in this document (Functional Tests: page
10-14, Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27, and
Troubleshooting with Functional Tests: page 10-55). Additional
information about CRTU Functional Tests may be found in the
AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160
Issue 8, January 1999.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
OFD Release
Reference
2.
3.
OFD for Holding Time (OFD-HT); and OFD for Paging (OFD-P).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
RCC Measurements
Reference
2.
3.
4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Service Measurements
Service Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Scheduling Service
Measurements
Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 7
Plant Measurements
Plant Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Scheduling Plant
Measurements
Related Documents:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Collecting VCSA
Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Collecting Measurements
The CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurements
(PLM) feature (CDMA FER/PLM) is currently under development and
committed for CDMA Release 8.0 availability. It will be similar to the
PLM capability that is already provided for analog systems. (The
analog PLM provides detailed information about the distribution of
power levels detected by setup, locate, and voice radios at a specified
cell site. The data are used by the AutoPACE system to investigate
system troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, and
plan growth.)
The CDMA FER/PLM feature will be built upon the Autoplex 1000
system capability to collect useful statistical data on systems. The
collected data will include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Noise Rises
5.
6.
7.
Pilot strength of the primary cell just prior to when the call is lost
8.
Signal-to-Noise ratio (Eb/No) set point just prior to when the call
is lost
9.
Based on the data, service providers will then be able to fine tune the
power control parameters and handoff parameters for the CDMA
operation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Hard faults
OFD -A declares a hard fault when there are no accesses on one carrier
and there are enough total access counts for the sector to make it highly
probable that the no-access carrier is faulty.
Soft faults
OFD -A declares a soft fault when there are some accesses on a carrier
but there are so many more accesses on the other carriers that it is
highly probable that the some-access carrier is faulty.
OFD Sample
OFD -A reports the worst access-channel fault for a sector and shows
the access-channel counts for all carriers having access channels on the
sector. An example OFD -A Output Message sent to the ROP file is
shown below.
Sample Output
OFD Sample
Access channel counts for the faulty and good carriers on the
sector; identifies the P/S/A CE for each carrier by CCC number,
CCU number, and CE number
After the initial OFD -A report has been issued, OFD -A will send a
report to the ECP every five minutes until the fault clears, as shown in
the example message below:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 11
Sample Output
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 12
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 13
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Scheduling Functional
Tests
Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual (ondemand) basis. For the latter case, in order to test new installations or
troubleshoot suspected problems, functional tests are initiated and
controlled from the ECP. The cell site performs the requested
functional test and returns the results to the ECP. Running functional
tests on a regularly scheduled basis ( routine functional tests) is a way
of checking the integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths. The
frequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site
translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing, the exact time of day
cannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail) are reported to the
ECP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 14
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Routine Maintenance
Scheduler (RMS)
Maintenance Request
Administrator (MRA)
MRA administers cell site maintenance requests and manages cell site
equipment status. The administration of maintenance requests includes
accepting, rejecting, sequencing, queuing, and reporting to the
technician interface.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 15
taking action. In all cases, either when an error occurs or when HEH
takes a recovery action, HEH sends a report to the ECP ROP.
Call Processing (CP)
Translations (TR)
Additional Information
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 16
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Scheduling Diagnostics
Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 17
Software Audits
Software Audits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Error Reporting
Scheduling Software
Audits
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 18
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Software Audits
Audit Types
Examples of Audits
CCPCCC - Verifies the data integrity between the CCC and the
cell.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 19
Software Audits
Related Documents:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 20
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Software Asserts
Software Asserts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Asserts Description
SIassert
Note that assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may require
escalation to the next level of technical support.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 21
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HEH Description
The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the
Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. HEH receives
error reports from hardware boards, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore,
remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, either HEH takes immediate
recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined
number of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH sends only
an error report to the ECP.
Specifically, the HEH plays a role in the following two different types
of board-level error reporting:
(1) Solicited Error Reporting
Every 30 minutes, HEH queries each active DS1, DFI, clock and tone
(CAT), and synchronized clock and tone (SCT) board for errors. (SCT
boards are installed only at cell sites that support CDMA operation.)
Each board responds with status messages containing a count of certain
timing or facility errors. There is an error threshold count for each type
of error; if the threshold is exceeded, HEH reports the error to the ECP
and takes recovery action.
(2) Autonomous Error Reporting
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 22
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Hardware Errors
BIU - bus interface unit; also reports errors for its associated
baseband combiner and radio (BCR) and analog conversion unit
(ACU) [The associated BIU, BCR, and ACU form a CDMA radio
setthe BBA, for BCR-BIU-ACU.]
SCT - synchronized clock & tone; also reports errors for the
reference frequency & timing generator (RFTG)
All of the cell site plug-in circuit boards listed above will report
autonomously four types of errors to HEH, to allow appropriate
diagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error types are:
1.
hardware errors,
2.
program-control errors,
3.
4.
Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Alarms are the first indication of cell-site trouble, indicating either: (1)
a software failure; (2) a hardware failure; or (3) a user-defined
condition. Alarms are classified according to the level of severity/
priority of required actions: Critical; Major; Power Failure; Minor;
Spurt Minor; Manual.
Scanned alarms are faults that are gathered by dedicated monitoring
circuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP. Unlike other faults,
scanned alarms are gathered from cell site equipment having no
associated software diagnostic tests. There is no automatic recovery for
scanned alarms.
AFI Boards
Alarm Reporting
The Alarm and Factory Installation and Test System (FITS) Interface
(AFI) boards, which are part of the RCC in the primary frame, monitor
both user-defined and equipment-scanned alarms. User-defined alarms
are gathered from alarm sensors external to the cell site equipment,
while equipment-scanned alarms are gathered from alarm sensors
within the various hardware frames of the cell site. All of the alarms are
reported to the ECP by the AFI circuit pack. In addition, some alarms
activate an LED display on the appropriate circuit pack.
In a PCS CDMA Minicell, the alarms scanned into the AFI can be
classified as follows:
1.
2.
3.
User alarms
4.
The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicells frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the
AFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).
The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment
sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports both
amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to
the AFI. The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests in
approximately a 2-second period of time.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 24
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
A LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit (CTU)
and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.
User Defined Alarms
Additional Information
Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 25
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 26
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCC
CCU CE #Fail
184
184
PhyAntFace
Carrier BBA
CCC CCU
CE #Fail
184
184
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 27
2.
the user (login) running the report must have permission to access
the ECP database.
Both the ROP file itself and the CRTUMON output files should be
examined carefully to find patterns of failing Channel Elements (CEs),
CDMA Channel Units (CCUs), CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs), or
entire Test Paths (TPs). Instead of analyzing in detail which parts of
which FTs resulted in particular types of failures, it is often useful to
focus instead on identifying consistent failures and patterns of failures.
Re-execute Functional
Tests
Review SDPs
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 28
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
OCFT Flow
OCFT Process
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 29
Once identified, you can attempt to conditionally restore the faulty unit
to see if it can be placed back into service. If the conditional restore
succeeds, scheduling of field maintenance on the unit can be deferred; if
the conditional restore does not succeed, field maintenance on the unit
needs to be scheduled more quickly. [6,7,8]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the migration of the overhead channels has not been successful, try
manual recovery, provided other CCUs that could carry the overhead
channels are available. [You can determine whether another CCU is
available for overhead channel migration by inspecting SDP 2139.] If
other CCUs are not available, schedule immediate field maintenance to
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 30
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
provide the needed CCUs. If other CCUs are available, attempt a manual
migration of the overhead channels to one of them. If this manual
recovery action does not succeed, proceed to the next step. [9,10,11]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the reason why the attempt to migrate the overhead channels failed
was not due to a lack of available CCUs, look at SDP 2139 to see if any
amplifier failures may have occurred. Look for LAC failures if the cell
site is a Series II cell or for CTU failures if the cell site is a PCS or
cellular Minicell. If any amplifier failure is found, take recovery action
to correct the non-CDMA problem. [12,13]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect SDP 2138 to determine the row (sector and shelf) that
corresponds to the failed channels. This page will indicate whether the
sector BBA is working (active) or OOS. If the BBA is OOS, issue the
command OP:CELL:BBA to find the status of the BBA and to
conditionally restore it to the active state. If this action fails to restore
the BBA, attempt to place the redundant BBA, if present, into service.
Important!Note that redundant BBAs are never present in
Minicells.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
If the overhead channels are still OOS, examine SDP 2138 to check the
CCC of the overhead channels. If the CCC is OOS, try to place the CCC
in service with a conditional restore command. When the conditional
restore command is applied to the CCC, the overhead channels will
automatically migrate to different CEs on another CCC. Run the OCFT
in the demand mode again to see if the overhead channels have been
restored. If the overhead channels now have been restored, schedule the
failed CCC for field maintenance. [16,17]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
If the OCFT still finds a fault on the sector, restore the CEs that are
carrying the overhead channels. [Use SDP 2139 to identify the CEs of
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 31
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 32
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
TPFT Flow Diagram
TP FT
FA U LT
S TA RT
11
2
ROP
M ESSAGE
4
3
SCHEDULE
F IE L D
M A IN T E N A N C E
ID E N T IF Y
FA U LT ?
YES
SCHEDULE
F IE L D
10
ID E N T IF Y
M O S T L IK E LY
U N IT
MAINTENANCE
NO
RUN TP FT
A G A IN
D U P L IC AT E
FA U LT ?
R E V IE W
ALL ROP
MESSAGES
YES
RUN TP FT
ON ALL
S E C TO R S
NO
CONTINUE
SYSTEM
OPERATION
TPFT Flow
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 33
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The system then sends a message to the ROP. The message shows the
CCC, CCU (either a TCU or ECU), and CE on which the fault was
found. There is no automatic recovery triggered by the TPFT. Any fault
detected by the CRTU might also result in faults detected on calls placed
by customers mobiles, which also would be reported to HEH. If the
reports of the fault meet certain HEH criteria, HEH might take recovery
action. [2]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
As the technician, you should examine the ROP to determine if the fault
has generated messages that have not yet triggered recovery by HEH. If
there are such messages, examine them for any pattern present to
identify which maintenance unit might be faulty. If the location of the
fault can be determined, schedule field maintenance of the faulty unit.
[3,4]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If a faulty unit cannot be identified, run TPFT again in the demand mode
to see if the fault can be reproduced. If the fault is not reproduced, the
fault is most likely a transient fault; take no action at the present time.
[5,6,7]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the fault can be reproduced, run the TPFT again in the demand mode
from all sectors in an attempt to gain additional information about the
location of the fault. In addition, review the ROP file again to determine
the best estimate of the maintenance unit that should be replaced. [See
Examples of Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-38 for
examples of TPFT pass/fail patterns caused by different types of board
failures.] Schedule field maintenance to replace the unit. [8,9,10,11]
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 34
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLFT Display
The Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) failures (resulting from out-oftolerance Pilot levels) generate both ROP output and alarms on the
Status Display Pages (SDPs). [For a PLFT to pass, the absolute value of
the expected pilot level measurement value minus the actual
measurement value must be less than or equal to the pilot level
tolerance value (a translations parameter). Otherwise, the pilot level
test fails.]
The ROP messages indicate both the actual measured pilot level value
and the expected pilot level value (calculated by the software, based on
amplifier type, pilot dgu, and the BCR attenuation values in
translations). As with OCFTs and TPFTs, a manually initiated PLFT
will always generate ROP output, whereas automatically initiated
(scheduled) PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs. The frequency of
scheduled PLFTs is set in translations.
The following excerpt from a ROP file shows the ROP message
resulting from a failed PLFT performed on a 2-carrier sector. The PLFT
ROP output report contains the actual (ACTL) and expected (EXP)
pilot level measurement values in dBm for each pilot channel on each
sector tested ( PL 0 = omni, PL 1 = sector 1, PL 2 = sector 2, ...). [For a
multiple-sector cell, PLFT first tests all pilot channels (carriers) on
sector 1 (alpha), then tests all pilot channels on sector 2 (beta), and so
on until PLFT has tested all pilot channels on all sectors of the cell.] For
any pilot channel having an out-of-tolerance ACTL measurement
value, the report includes an error reason of OUT OF RANGE.
Output Sample
2.
3.
the affected CCC and PAF as degraded (yellow) on the 2138 SDP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 35
Translations Affecting
PLFT
1.
2.
PLFT Field
Screen
ceqface form
ecp form
ecp form
Alternate Screen
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 36
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5.
6.
7.
8.
Verify that the actual result is within 1dB of the expected results.
If not, repeat the calibration process.
9.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 37
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 38
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewMore Information
The following example of the use of CRTU OCFTs and TPFTs for
troubleshooting a PCS CDMA Minicell is taken from a Fax Flash
document: AUTOPLEX CTSO Fax Flash 97-236, Detecting Failed
CTUs in PCS CDMA Minicells using the CRTU, dated 12/4/97. This
Fax Flash contains more detailed information than what is included
here as well as additional examples. It should be consulted by
interested readers.
Cells equipped with a CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) can use it to
detect a failed CTU, remotely from the MSC. The CRTU cannot
currently isolate a specific component as a failure, but it can detect a
problem in the overall traffic path (MSC to the Output port of the
Minicell). Following are excerpts from the Read Only Printer (ROP)
showing the series of messages received from a cell with a failed CTU
in the Alpha sector. Once understood, one can determine, even from a
location remote from the cell site (such as the location of the ECP),
that the CTU is a likely suspect for failure despite the lack of an alarm.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 39
FT OC, COMPLETED
PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOT
1 NOT STARTED
2 NOT STARTED
#456859
...........................................................................................................................................................................
FT OC, COMPLETED
COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
1 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
2 SKIPPED
#456864
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 40
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
CRTU is removed from service and a RED Alarm appears on the 2131
Page of the MCRT, and the overall cell status changes from Green to
Red on the 2121 page.
* 12 OP:CELL 131 CRTU, OOS, FRCELL, TBLANL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 41
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Cell was restored and the Functional Test for the Traffic Path was
started.
M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, STARTED
09/19/97 14:20:47 #457266
M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 0
SKIPPED
UNIT OUT OF SERVICE
09/19/97 14:20:47 #457267
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Alpha Sector detected no pilot, and again moves the Overhead Channels
to the next CCU (CCU 2)
M 23 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 1
PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOT
09/19/97 14:23:08 #457334
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
14
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 42
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
17
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
18
19
Analysis
If this scenario is completed, it would indicate that since the CCUs all
passed diagnostics, and the CRTU passed diagnostics, the problem
would have to be somewhere after the CCUs, (i.e., something in the RF
path, either the BCR, CTU, or some RF portion of the RF test network).
At this point, other data, such as service measurements, or looking at
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 43
the power at the coupled port, could be used to further troubleshoot the
problem, and a technician could be dispatched to the cell for additional
testing.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 44
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Error Process
...........................................................................................................................................................................
4,
CE
NO_OVERHEAD
...........................................................................................................................................................................
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 45
2
2
2
Analysis
4
4
4
1
3
4
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
Note that all of the idle CEs in the bad ECU (CCC # 4) result in TPFT
failures, while in this example, none of the CEs in other ECUs result in
failures.
The pattern is clear: When an ECU board is bad, all of the CEs that
comprise the bad ECU will fail in TPFTs. Whenever this pattern of
TPFT failures occurs in ROP messages, a bad ECU board may quickly
be identified and replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 46
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewProblem
Description
Error Process
...........................................................................................................................................................................
It is quite likely that, initially, an OCFT involving the bad CCC would
fail, resulting in a ROP message like the following example:
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CCC 2,
CCU 4,
CE 1
PID: OS = FTSUPV,
N/A,
0
FT OC
1
CARRIER
1 FAILURE:
NO_OVERHEAD
...........................................................................................................................................................................
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 47
2
2
4
4
3
4
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
FAILED
FAILED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The pattern of failures in the above ROP message differs clearly and
markedly from that shown in the previous example. In this case, all of
the CEs belonging to all of the CCUs that are controlled by the bad CCC
cause TPFT failures. A ROP message that looks like the above example
provides strong evidence that the most likely cause of failure is a bad
CCC board, CCC # 2 in this example.
Important!Note, however, that the above ROP message does not
indicate with 100% certainty that the faulty hardware is the CCC
#2 board. It is (remotely) possible that CCC # 2 is actually O.K.,
and that the reasons for all of the TPFT failures listed in the ROP
message are due to a coincidental simultaneous failure of the three
different CCU boards: CCU # 2, CCU # 3, and CCU # 4.
Simultaneous failures of so many boards is a very unlikely
occurrence. It is much more reasonable to assume in this case that
the failures are due to the CCC # 2 board being bad. The
likelihood of this assumption being correct increases if several
successive ROP messages or a CRTUMON Summary Output
Report for some extended time period show the same failure
patterns involving TPFT failures of CCC # 2.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 48
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
it is equally likely that either the CCC # 2 board is bad or the CCU # 1
board is bad. (In addition, there is a small likelihood that both boards
could be bad.) Additional ROP messages and CRTUMON Summary
Output Reports for extended time periods will only serve to increase our
certainty that one (or both) of these two different boards may be bad;
they will not help to resolve the ambiguity regarding which board is in
fact bad.
Analysis
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 49
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 50
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
From the figure we can observe that each shelf contains a single CCC
board, which is connected (through its CCU boards) to a single ACU
board, also on the same shelf. It follows that failure of an ACU board
will cause FT failures to occur for the CCC board (and its associated
CCU boards) that are directly linked to the bad ACU on the same shelf.
Because of this one-to-one relationship between the ACU and the CCC
on the same shelf, the FT failure patterns observable are essentially the
same as what was discussed in the previous example.
Overhead Channel
Migration
TPFT Failures
The bad ACU will continue to cause TPFT failures to occur, however.
Because of the direct one-to-one linkage between ACU # 2 and CCC #
2, essentially the same TPFT failure patterns as those described in the
previous example would be observed. As a result, there would exist an
ambiguity in the fault isolation process: it would not be possible to
determine with certainty whether the observed FT failures are due to
the ACU board or to the CCC board directly linked to it on the same
shelf.
Important!Note, however, that if the suspect CCC board is in fact
bad, then depending upon the nature of the CCC failure, the
dedicated CDMA packet pipe that terminates on the CCC may
experience trouble. The status of the Packet Pipe Trunk Group
Number (PP TG No.) that matches the suspect CCC should be
checked on Status Display Page (SDP) 2139. If the packet pipe
status is either blocked or out of service, it is more likely that the
TPFT failures are being caused by the CCC board; if the status of
the packet pipe shows no sign of trouble, it is more likely that the
TPFT failures are being caused by the ACU board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 51
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
Analysis
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 52
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
BIU Description
Analysis
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 53
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 54
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA functional tests make use of many hardware units at the cell
and involve communication between many software subsystems at the
cell and at the switch. Any failure in hardware or software during a
CDMA functional test is reported as an error to the FT software
subsystem, which reports the error to the RMS and HEH software
subsystems. Typical reasons why CDMA functional tests fail include:
Failure to set up properly the initial MOST call is one of the most
common failures observed at a cell site having a newly installed CRTU.
If FT aborts the functional test due to a failed origination, RMS will
report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and HEH
will report a NOCALLORIG error for an automatic request. If FT
aborts the functional test due to a lost call information message, RMS
will report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and
HEH will report a NOCALLINF error for an automatic request.
Important!Note that it is normal for some CDMA functional test
errors to occur intermittently without valid cause. Currently, about
one such error may be expected to occur every couple of days,
depending upon functional test interval values, cell equipage, and
so on.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 55
RC/V Problems
RC/V Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTU dials the CDMA MOST directory number to start a CDMA
functional test. If FT aborts the functional test due to a missing CDMA
MOST directory number, RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILED
error for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG error
for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Go to screen 1 of the RC/V sub form and enter the CRTU directory
number and other mobile-related data. Set the Mobile Directory
Number Type field to y.
Incorrect Mobile Country
Code
If the mobile country code parameter for the CRTU is not correct, FT
will abort thefunctional test. RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILED
error for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG error
for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Use the Mobile Country Code field on screen 5 of the RC/V cgsa form
to enter the correct mobile country code (310 in USA).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 56
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CRTU Problems
CRTU Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Visit the cell site and use the Programming Setup Tool (PST) to check/
change the following CRTU mobile-related parameters at the CRTUm:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 57
CRTU Problems
Communication With
Mobile Failure
Visit the cell site and check that the CRTUm has operating power (+24
Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the CRTUm; replace
the CRTUm, if necessary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 58
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
RSP Problems
RSP Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Visit the cell site and check that the RSP has operating power (+24
Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the RSP; replace the
RSP, if necessary.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 59
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problems Allocating a
Traffic CE
There are several reasons why RCC call processing might not be able
to allocate a traffic CE, including:
Interconnected 3-Shell
Subshelf
Packet pipes for the sector under test are out-of-service or blocked
(blocked from the cell, blocked from the DCS)
Error remedy:
Consult the cell site status display pages to check hardware status at the
cell; if necessary, visit the cell site and manually identify, isolate, and
clear the error.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 60
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The list of CDMA Functional test faults & likely causes, which is
adapted from Table 32-3 on pages 32-106 through 32-109 of the
AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160
Issue 6, January 1998, tabulates the Error Codes of the possible reasons
why CDMA functional tests can fail. Each Error Code is followed by a
brief description of what the failing Error Code means, and this, in turn,
is followed by one or more high-level causes that are most probably
responsible for causing the CDMA functional test error. These probable
causes are based on the failing reason reported by HEH.
Each of the entries in the list has the following general format:
ERROR CODE [Description of Error] => Probable Cause or Causes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 61
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 62
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 63
Complementary
Troubleshooting Tools
The above list of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes
provides a useful starting point for troubleshooting faults revealed by
CDMA Functional Tests. However, by itself it is not sufficient to
completely identify, locate, and correct system faults. The list should be
used for initial guidance in troubleshooting, then it should be followed
by use of one or more of the following complementary troubleshooting
tools to gather more detailed information about the nature and probable
cause(s) of the fault:
CRTUMON ROP Processing Tool (See pages 32-87 through 3292 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems,
System 1000, Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January 1999)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 64
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 65
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Meaning of Parameters:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 66
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 67
1 - CSC, NCI
2 - DL
1 - DS1
TLP Indicates executing trouble locating procedure (TLP) at the
conclusion of the diagnostic. TLP generates a list of suspected faulty
equipment.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not specify the TLP and UCL
parameters in the same command line because the accuracy of the TLP
listing could be affected.
CHANLe Indicates the channel number (1-1023) used to diagnose the
location radio, setup radio, or the test generator test unit. If the channel
is not available at the cell site, the diagnostic request is denied.
NOTE: If the CHANL parameter is not specified, the diagnostic
supervisor chooses any available channel.
CLASSf Indicates message class override (151-213).
NOTE: This option can only be used if the Virtual System Output
Message Routing feature is supported.
The following is an example of a successful output report made in
response to the issuance of a DGN:CELL diagnostic request:
DGN CELL 1 BBA 7 COMPLETED ATP
Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure
(TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnostic
encounters a failure. The location of suspect units at fault is given in
hard-copy format. In most cases, when a diagnostic failure occurs, you
will be able to clear the trouble by replacing one of the suspect units
listed on the TLP.
Important!It is important to include the TLP option when issuing
the DGN:CELL diagnostic request so that the TLP list of
suspected faulty units will be printed at the conclusion of the
diagnostic.
TLP Output Message
The specific format of the TLP output (Message Type 316) is described
under DGN CELL TLP in the AUTOPLEX Cellular
Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Output Messages 401-610057. It is reproduced here for Series II Cell Sites.
DGN:CELL a b, TLP
10 - 68
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
This output message indicates the unit ID, the frame, the class of
circuits, and the vertical and horizontal location of each board in the
trouble-location procedure (TLP) list whenever the TLP option is
selected in a DGN request. This message is printed following a sometest-failed (STF) message.
VARIABLE FIELD
DEFINITIONS:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 69
g = Shelf number.
h = Slot number.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 70
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Running Audits
Audit Complexity
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10 - 71
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 72
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO Glossary
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO - 1
Glossary
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBA trio Bus interface, baseband, and analog components for one
CDMA radio shelf. Redundant BBA trio is optional.
BCR Baseband combiner and radioused in the CDMA-equipped
cell site to modulate the spread-spectrum voice, sync, and pilot
channels.
BER Bit error ratethe number of digital pulses detected as errors in
a specific time period. Error rates measure the quality of a digital
circuit.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 2
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO - 3
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 4
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO - 5
Glossary
NCT Network control and timing linksfiber optic links between the
SMs and the CM in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS. NCT links process 512
time slots; NCT2 links process 1024 time slots.
Neighbor cell A neighbor cell is a cell that is adjacent to the cell
currently serving a mobile subscriber.
Neighbor group A group of cell sites near the cell site serving a call.
When a handoff is required from the serving cell site, the system tries to
handoff the call to one of the cells in the group.
Neighbor list A list of cell sites in a neighbor group.
NVM Nonvolatile memorya device that retains its memory even
after power is removed. NVM updates are normally performed after
cell site generic program changes.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 6
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
Packet pipe A group of DS0s, in the same DS1, that transmit and
receive voice and data between the speech handler and CCC in the cell
site.
PAF Physical antenna facea transmit antenna and its associated
receive antennas. The cells can have from one to six physical antenna
faces.
PCM Pulse code modulationthe 8-bit code that is created during
the encoding step of analog/digital conversion.
PCS Personal communications services are services planned for new
digital RF equipment operating in the 2-GHz spectrum.
PCSC PCS switching centerthe access manager, combined with at
least one DCS and an IMS.
PHA PSU2-to-ATM interfaceoptional board that provides
connectivity from PSU2 to ATM network when handoff between
different 5ESS-2000 Switch DCSs is performed.
PHV Protocol handler voicecontains either 8 kbps or 13 kbps in
PSU2. Also called PHV1 for 8 kbps and PHV2 for 13 kbps in PSU2.
Pilot Channel CDMA channel used by the mobile unit to determine
correct transmit power level.
PN Pseudorandom noiserandom code used to spread CDMA voice
or data prior to modulation.
PSTN Public switched telephone network consists of switching
equipment external to the PCSC. May consist of local, long-distance,
and SS7 networks.
PSU Packet switch unit 2transforms DS0s into packet pipes. A
packet pipe handles approximately four time the calls that a DS0 does.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO - 7
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 8
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO - 9
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 10
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
See notice on first page
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999